Home

Operating Instructions - FTP Directory Listing

1. MAIN POWER OFF ON lo IJ 1 2 3 DVI D HDMI Panasonic PROJECTOR SDI 1 2 1 Connect the power cord to the projector body 2 Connect the power plug to an outlet AC 220 V 240 V 50 Hz 60 Hz 3 Press the ON side of the MAIN POWER switch to turn on the power e The power indicator ON G STANDBY R gt will light in red and the projector will enter the standby mode 4 Press the power on button The power indicator ON G STANDBY R gt lights in green and the image is soon projected on the screen Attention Using the projector while the lens cover is attached may cause the device to heat up and result in a fire Note e f the projector is switched on at around 0 C 32 F a warm up period of approximately five minutes may be necessary until an image is displayed The temperature indicator TEMP lights during the warm up period When the warm up is completed the temperature indicator TEMP turns off and the projection starts Refer to When an indicator lights up page 158 for the indicator status e f the operating environment temperature is low and warm up takes more than five minutes the projector will judge that a problem has occurred and the power will automatically be set to standby mode If this happens incre
2. Scanning freq Dot clock Plug and play Resolution Mode Horizontal Vertical freq Format DVI D Dots MH RGB2 HDMI kHz Hz MHz EDID1 EDID2 EDID3 800 x 600 35 2 56 3 36 0 R D H 4 v v v 800 x 600 37 9 60 3 40 0 R D H 4 4 4 4 SVGA 800 x 600 48 1 72 2 50 0 R D H V 4 4 4 800 x 600 46 9 75 0 49 5 R D H 4 4 4 4 800 x 600 53 7 85 1 56 3 R D H MAC16 832 x 624 49 7 74 6 57 3 R D H V 4 4 4 1 024 x 768 39 6 50 0 51 9 R D H 1 024 x 768 48 4 60 0 65 0 R D H 4 4 4 4 1024 x 768 56 5 70 1 75 0 R D H V 4 4 4 XGA 1 024 x 768 60 0 75 0 78 8 R D H 4 V 4 4 1 024 x 768 65 5 81 6 86 0 R D H 1024 x 768 68 7 85 0 94 5 R D H 1 024 x 768 81 4 100 0 113 3 R D H 7 1 024 x 768 98 8 120 0 139 1 R D H 7 V 4 4 4 1152x 864 53 7 60 0 81 6 R D H 1152x 864 64 0 70 0 94 2 R D H MXGA 1 152 x 864 67 5 74 9 108 0 R D H M 1152x864 76 7 85 0 121 5 R D H MAC21 1 152 x 870 68 7 75 1 100 0 R D H 4 4 v 4 1 280 x 720 37 1 49 8 60 5 R D H 1 280 x 720 44 8 59 9 74 5 R D H LI 1280 x 720 1 280 x 720 76 3 100 0 131 8 R D H 7 1 280 x 720 92 6 120 0 161 6 R D H 7 1 280 x 768 39 6 49 9 65 3 R D H 1 280 x 768 47 8 59 9 79 5 R D H 1280 x 768
3. Unit m Lens type Zoom lens Projection lens Model No ET D75LE1 ET D75LE2 ET D75LE3 ET D75LE4 ET D75LE8 ET D75LE6 Throw ratio 1 4 1 8 1 1 8 2 8 1 2 8 4 6 1 4 6 7 4 1 7 3 13 8 1 0 9 1 1 1 Projection screen size Projection distance L Height Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Diagonal SD sq Width SW wy an aw an aw an aw an aw an aw an 1 78 70 0 942 1 508 2 01 2 69 272 4 10 4 11 6 90 6 91 11 06 10 78 20 56 1 35 1 62 2 03 80 1 077 1 723 2 31 3 09 3 12 4 70 4 71 7 90 7 91 12 66 12 37 23 55 1 55 1 86 2 29 90 1 212 1 939 2 61 3 49 3 52 530 531 8 91 8 91 14 25 13 97 26 54 1 76 2 10 2 54 100 1 346 2 154 2 91 3 89 3 92 5 90 5 91 9 91 9 91 15 85 15 57 29 53 1 96 2 34 3 05 120 1 615 2 585 3 51 4 68 4 73 7 10 7 11 11 91 11 92 19 04 18 76 35 50 2 36 2 82 3 81 150 2 019 3 231 4 40 5 88 5 93 8 90 8 91 14 92 14 93 23 82 23 54 44 47 2 96 3 55 5 08 200 2 692 4 308 5 89 7 87 7 93 11 91 11 92 19 94 19 95 31 80 31 52 59 41 3 97 4 75 6 35 250 3 365 5 385 7 39 9 87 9 93 14 91 14 92 24 95 24 96 39 77 39 49 74 36 4 98 5 96 7 62 300 4 039 6 462 8 88 11 86 11 93 17 91 17 92 29 97 29 98 47 75 47 47 89 30 5 99 7 17 8 89 350 4 712 7 539 10 37 13 86 13 9
4. i c Set the image display system for use with 3D system adjustments 1 Press A V to select 3D TEST MODE 2 Press 4b to switch the item NORMAL Standard setting SIDE BY SIDE The left eye image is displayed on the left next to the right eye image displayed on the right LEFT LEFT Both the left eye image and right eye image display the left eye input signal RIGHT RIGHT Both the left eye image and right eye image display the right eye input signal LEFT BLACK The left eye input signal is displayed in the left eye image and a completely black image is displayed in the right eye image BLACK RIGHT A completely black image is displayed in the left eye image and the right input signal is displayed in the right eye image Note The 3D TEST MODE settings return to NORMAL when the projector is switched off This is disabled when 3D SYSTEM SETTING is set to other than SINGLE This is disabled when 3D TEST PATTERN is displayed 94 ENGLISH Chapter4 Settings 3D SETTINGS menu 3D TEST PATTERN 1 1 The 3D test pattern can be used to check operation and make adjustments even without a 3D signal 1 Press A to select 3D TEST PATTERN 2 Press 4b to switch the item Menu screen Entry screen Menu screen Left white Right black Select a test pattern so that it is easy to check operations and make adjustments Menu screen Left black
5. WSXGA 1 680 x 1 050 54 1 50 0 119 5 R D H 180 ENGLISH Chapter 6 Appendix Technical information Scanning freq Dot clock Plug and play Resolution 7 E Mode Horizontal Vertical freq Format DVI D Dots MH RGB2 HDMI kHz Hz MHz EDID1 EDID2 EDID3 1 920 x 1 080 55 6 49 9 141 5 R D H 1920 x 1080 1 920 x 1 080 8 66 6 59 9 138 5 R D H 1 920 x 1 08010 67 2 60 0 173 0 R 1 920 x 1 200 61 8 49 9 158 3 R D H WUXGA 1 920 x 1 200 8 74 0 60 0 154 0 R D H V v Yn ve 1 920 x 1 200 10 74 6 59 9 193 3 R 1 Signals with v in the Plug and play columns are signals described in EDID extended display identification data of the projector A signal which has no v in the Plug and play columns but has an entry in the Format column can be input For signals without v in the Plug and play columns resolution may not be selected in the computer even though the projector supports them 2 For single link connections only 8 Pixel Repetition signal dot clock frequency 27 0 MHz only 4 When a 1125 1035 60i signal was input it is displayed as a 1125 1080 60i signal 5 Only for SDI1 6 For dual link connections only 7 When 3D INPUT FORMAT is set to AUTO 3D images in frame sequential format are displayed
6. Note The CLOCK PHASE setting is enabled at simultaneous input of RGB1 and RGB2 to adjust the right eye image This is disabled when 3D SYSTEM SETTING is set to other than SINGLE This is disabled when 3D TEST PATTERN is displayed This is disabled when 3D TEST MODE is set to other than NORMAL or SIDE BY SIDE The 3D waveform monitor is displayed only when the 3D PICTURE BALANCE screen is displayed The normal waveform monitor cannot be displayed in 3D images Set the black display period to be displayed between the right eye image and the left eye image as necessary for the 3D system used 1 Press A V to select DARK TIME SETTING 2 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button 0 5 ms 1 0 ms 1 5 ms 2 0 ms 2 5 ms 2 7 ms Set so that the 3D setting is displayed correctly Note This is disabled when 3D SYSTEM SETTING is set to other than SINGLE When the setting does not correspond to the 3D system in use phenomenon such as increased crosstalk and darkening of displayed images may occur SD FRAME DELAY Adjust the timing of the left right switch of an image 1 Press A V to select 3D FRAME DELAY 2 Press 4b to switch the item 0us 25 000 us Allows you to set in increments of 10 us The adjustment range depends on the input signal SD TEST MODE J
7. Perform the initial setting of the network before using the network function 1 2 3 4 Press A V to select NETWORK SETUP Press the ENTER button The NETWORK SETUP screen is displayed Press AY to select an item and change the settings according to the operation instructions of the menu PROJECTOR NAME Change the setting when using a DHCP server Set to ON when obtaining an IP address automatically using a DHCP server Set to OFF when not BEEF using a DHCP server IP ADDRESS Enter the IP address when not using a DHCP server SUBNET MASK Enter the subnet mask when not using a DHCP server DEFAULT GATEWAY Enter the default gateway address when not using a DHCP server STORE Save the current network settings Press AY to select STORE and press the ENTER button 5 When the confirmation screen is displayed press 4P to select OK and press the ENTER button Note When using a DHCP server confirm that the DHCP server is running Consult your network administrator regarding the IP address subnet mask and default gateway When Art Net SETUP is set to ON 2 X X X or ON 10 X X X NETWORK SETUP cannot be selected NETWORK CONTROL 1 1 2 2 Set up the control method of the network 1 2 3 Press A V to select NETWORK CONTROL Press the ENTER button The NETWORK CONTROL screen is displayed Press A VW to select an item
8. 5 ZA CZ Projection screen height V ENGLISH 57 Chapter 3 Basic Operations Projecting ET D75LE1 ET D75LE2 ET D75LE3 ET D75LE4 Projection lens Model No ET D75LE8 ET D75LE10 ET D75LE20 ET D75LE6 ET D75LE30 ET D75LE40 a screen dp um oe width H e Y 7 7 Zz 7 7 gt PT DW11KE LY r j r 7 Standard projection position Standard projection position Note e When the optional fixed focus lens Model No ET D75LE5 ET D75LE50 is attached the shift cannot be adjusted Focus balance Relationship between the tilt of the lens and the screen focus surface When the projection lens is tilted in contrast with the image forming surface tilting the front side screen side of the projection lens downwards in the direction of the dotted arrow line the upper side of the screen focus surface will tilt inwards and the lower side will tilt outwards as shown in the example Projection lens Image forming surface Screen focus surface How to adjust the focus balance adjustment by tilting the lens mounter When the entire screen surface is not uniform even if the focus has been adjusted the lens mounter has focus adjustment screws in three locations Tool used Hex driver or Allen wrench diagonal 2 5 mm 3 32 The Allen wrench is included with the projection lens ET D75LE6 ET D75LE8 Lens mounter structur
9. When web control administrator rights password is not set Non protect mode Connecting 1 Obtain the IP address and port number Initial set value 1024 of the projector and request for a connection to the projector You can obtain both the IP address and the port number from the menu screen of the projector IP address Obtain from the main menu gt NETWORK gt NETWORK STATUS Port number Obtain from the main menu gt NETWORK gt NETWORK CONTROL COMMAND PORT 2 Check the response from the projector Data section Blank Mode genminaon symbol Command NTCONTROL BS 0 CR example ASCII string 0x20 0x30 OxOd Data length 9 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Mode 0 Non protect mode Command transmission method Transmit using the following command formats B Transmitted data r Termination Header Data section symbol Command 0 0 Control command CR example 0x30 0x30 ASCII string Ox0d Data length 1 byte 1 byte Undefined length 1 byte E Received data 1 Termination Header Data section symbol Command 0 0 Control command CR example 0x30 0x30 ASCII string Ox0d Data length 1 byte 1 byte Undefined length 1 byte 172 ENGLISH Chapter 6 Appendix Technical information B Error response String Details Termination symbol ERR1 Undefi
10. 1 Tools Info Help Tabs for selecting the setting information or help page of the projector 2 POWER Turns on off the power 3 SHUTTER Switches the setting whether to use the shutter function closing opening of the shutter Tools page Click Tools on the control page Input Select Controls input selection Not available when the power of the projector is turned off Menu screen control buttons Navigates the menu screen Freeze image quality adjustment Controls items related to freeze image quality Back Performs return to the previous page PID 5 Port 41794 Control System User Password IP Address 192 168 024 Enabled New Password 2 Confirm L Send Send DHCP Enabled p Address 0290800 Admin Password svete a Len own cat TORT nensi i ons seve comm Send 1 Control System Set the information required for communicating with the controller to be connected with the projector 2 User Password Set the user rights password for the RoomView control page 3 Admin Password Set the administrator rights password for the RoomView control page 4 Network status Displays the settings of wired LAN DHCP Displays the current setting Ip Address Displays the current setting Subnet Mask Displays the current setting Default Gateway Di
11. B BACK COLOR BACKUP INPUT SETTING BLANKING BRIGHTNESS BRIGHTNESS CONTROL 03 Cautions on use Cautions when installing Cautions when transporting Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors CLAMP POSITION CLOCK PHASE COLOR COLOR MATCHING COLOR TEMPERATURE Connecting the power cord Connecting to the projector with a cable Connection CONTRAST CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD M ACA 135 CONTROL DEVICE SETUP COOLING CONDITION Crestron RoomView CUT OFF D DARK TIME SETTING DATE AND TIME DEFAULT button Remote control Deleting the registered signal DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY Dimensions Display language DISPLAY OPTION DISPLAY SETTING Disposal lt DVI D gt button Projector body Remote control DVI D IN J m DYNAMIC TRIS nencia E EDGE BEENDING i retreat 87 ENTER button Projector body Remote control Expanding signal lock in range F Filter indicator abra tepore te elc 158 lt FOCUS gt button Remote control FRAME LOCK FRAME RESPONSE FREEZE FUNC button Remote control Function button FUNCTION BUTTON G GAMMA GEOMETRY H lt HDMI gt button Projector body Remote control HDMI IN HIGH ALTITUDE MODE l lt ID ALL gt button Remote control sse 24 28 ID SET button Remote control I
12. FOR YOUR SAFETY PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience A 13 amp fuse is fitted in this plug Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 13 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 Check for the ASTA mark D or the BSI mark g on the body of the fuse If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from an Authorised Service Center If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for the mains socket in your home then the fuse should be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safely There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring code as shown below If in any doubt please consult a qualified electrician WARNING THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code Green and Yellow Earth Blue Neutral Brown Live As the colours of the wire in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is c
13. 2 Press the ENTER button The UNIFORMITY screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select PC CORRECTION 4 Press 4b to switch the item Parameter Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment Press the gt button Deepens upper colors VERTICAL Press the 4 button Deepens lower colors 427 127 Press the gt button Deepens colors on the left HORIZONTAL Press the 4 button Deepens colors on the right OFF Does not use a computer to correct ON Use a computer to correct the brightness and color unevenness of the entire screen 1 Advanced skills are necessary to use computer controls to correct Consult your dealer Note e UNIFORMITY can be set for each LAMP SELECT setting The UNIFORMITY settings are not reset to the factory default when INITIALIZE is executed ENGLISH 105 Chapter4 Settings DISPLAY OPTION menu SHUTTER SETTING 1 Set image fade in and fade out at opening and closing of the shutter Set automatic opening and closing of the shutter when power is turned on Setting FADE IN or FADE OUT 1 Press A V to select SHUTTER SETTING 2 Press the ENTER button The SHUTTER SETTING screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select FADE IN or FADE OUT 4 Press 4b to switch the item Item Adjustment OFF Does not set fade in or fade out FADE IN Allows you to set the fade in or fade out time FADE OUT 0 5 s
14. 30p FIXED Only during 480i or 1080 60i signal input Note In DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY the picture quality will degrade when a signal other than the 2 2 pulldown is set as 25p FIXED or 30p FIXED Vertical resolution will degrade When FRAME RESPONSE is set to FAST DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY cannot be set BLANKING Kyy You can adjust the blanking width if there are noises at the edge of the screen or the image is slightly running out from the screen while an image from the VCR or other devices are projected 1 Press AY to select BLANKING 2 Press the lt ENTER gt button The BLANKING adjustment screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select UPPER LOWER LEFT or RIGHT When CUSTOM MASKING is set to an item PC 1 PC 2 or PC 3 other than OFF the blanking width can be adjusted to any shape using the computer Up to three blanking settings adjusted using the computer can be saved To use the CUSTOM MASKING function the optional Upgrade Kit Model No ET UK20 is required To purchase the product consult your dealer 4 Press 4b to adjust the blanking width ENGLISH 85 Chapter 4 Settings ADVANCED MENU menu Blanking correction Item Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment Press the 4 The blanking zone 7 button moves upward Y Top of the screen UPPER Press the gt The blanking zone PT DZ13KE PT DZ10KE button moves downwa
15. 5 Switch on the projector 9 page 53 6 Makeinitial settings gt page 22 Take this step when you switch on the power for the first time after purchasing the projector 7 Select the input signal 9 page 56 8 Adjust the image 9 page 56 ENGLISH 11 Contents Contents Ieackthis firetl c NEUE 2 Chapter1 Preparation Precautions for use 16 Cautions when transporting 16 Cautions when installing 16 SEG N nied niece teet eie dete o mes 18 AN Net stet sedet tet ds 18 Disposal aeter etie EUER dtum 18 Cautions on use 18 Software information regarding this product 19 Accessories sssssssssssssseeeenee 20 Optional accessories 21 Start up display sssssssssssssss 22 Focus adjustment 22 Initial setting display language 22 Initial setting installation setting 0 00 23 Initial setting screen setting 23 About your projector 24 Remote control 24 Projector body tete 25 Using the remote control 28 Inserting and removing the batteries 28 Setting the remote control ID numbers 28 Connecting to the projector with a cable 29 Chapter2 Getting Started Setting Up eet nre etes 31 Installation mode 31 Parts for ceiling mount optional 32 Screen size and throw distance 32 Adjusting adjustable feet 45 Attaching removing the projec
16. 10 0 s Select an item from 0 5 s to 4 0 s 5 0 s 7 0 s and 10 0 s 0 5 s 4 0 s can be selected in increments of 0 5 Note e Press the SHUTTER button on the remote control or the control panel during fade in or fade out to cancel the fade operation Setting STARTUP 1 Press A V to select SHUTTER SETTING 2 Press the ENTER button The SHUTTER SETTING screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select STARTUP 4 Press 4b to switch the item OPEN Projection begins with the shutter open when the power is turned on CLOSE Projection begins with the shutter close when the power is turned on FREEZE yyy Pause the projected image temporarily regardless of the playback of the external device 1 Press A V to select FREEZE 2 Press the ENTER button e Press the MENU button to release Note e FREEZE is displayed on the screen when video is paused WAVEFORM MONITOR 1 11 Use the input signals from a connected external device to display in a waveform Check whether video output luminance signal level is within the recommended range for the projector and adjust 1 Press A V to select WAVEFORM MONITOR 2 Press 4b to switch the item OFF Does not display the waveform monitor ON Displays the waveform monitor 3 Press the MENU button two times to clear 4 Press A V to select any horizontal line 106 ENGLISH
17. 130 Registering new signals 130 Renaming the registered signal 130 Deleting the registered signal 130 Protecting the registered signal 131 Expanding signal lock in range 131 Sub memory sss 132 SECURITY menu 133 SECURITY PASSWORD 133 SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE 133 DISPLAY SETTING 134 TEXT CHANGE nette tti 134 CONTROL DEVICE SETUP 134 CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE T cm 135 NETWORK menu 137 NETWORK SETUP 137 NETWORK CONTROL 137 NETWORK STATUS sss 138 Ar Net SE UP e etre 138 Network connections 138 Accessing from the web browser 140 ENGLISH 13 Contents Lamp temperature filter indicators 158 When an indicator lights up 158 Maintenance replacement ss 160 Before performing maintenance replacement 160 Maintenance e 160 Replacing the unit 162 Troubleshooting 166 Chapter6 Appendix gt Technical information sssss 169 PJLink protocol 2 tette tede 169 Using Art Net function 170 Control commands via LAN 171 SERIAL IN gt lt SERIAL OUT gt terminal 173 lt REMOTE 2 IN gt terminal 177 Two window display combination list 178 Control device password 178 Upgrade ib seeded teer 179 List of compatible signals 179 Specificat
18. RGB IN 1 Set to match the signal to input to the lt RGB 1 IN gt terminal Setting RGB1 INPUT SETTING 1 Press A V to select RGB IN 2 Press the ENTER button The RGB IN screen is displayed 3 Press AY to select RGB1 INPUT SETTING 4 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button RGB YP amp P Select when inputting an RGB signal or YCgCr YPgPp signals to the RGB 1 IN terminal Y C Select when inputting a luminance signal and color signal to the RGB 1 IN terminal Switching the slice level of an input sync signal 1 Press A V to select RGB IN 2 Press the ENTER button The RGB IN screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select RGB1 SYNC SLICE LEVEL or RGB2 SYNC SLICE LEVEL 4 Press 4b to switch the item LOW Sets the slice level to LOW J HIGH Sets the slice level to HIGH 100 ENGLISH Chapter4 Settings DISPLAY OPTION menu DVI D IN 00000 0 Switch the setting when the external device is connected to the DVI D IN terminal of the projector and the image is not projected correctly 1 Press A V to select DVI D IN 2 Press the ENTER button The DVI D IN screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select EDID 4 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button EDID3 Recognizes movie based video signals and still image
19. button is pressed The projector may not operate when the lamp indicators lt LAMP1 gt lt LAMP2 gt or temperature indicator TEMP are flashing page 158 Green Lit Projecting Orange Lit The projector is preparing to switch off the projector The power is switched off after a while Changes to the standby mode 52 ENGLISH Chapter 3 Basic Operations Switching on off the projector Note While the power indicator ON G STANDBY R gt is lit in orange the fan is running to cool the projector For about 75 seconds after the projector is switched off and the luminous lamp cooling is started the lamp indicators will not light up even if the power is switched on After the power indicator ON G STANDBY R gt lights in red turn on the power again The projector consumes power even in standby mode power indicator ON G STANDBY R gt lit in red Refer to Power consumption 9 page 184 for the power consumption The power indicator ON G STANDBY R gt flashes if a remote control signal is received The power indicator ON G STANDBY R gt flashes slowly in green while the shutter is closed e f the power indicator ON G STANDBY R gt is flashing in red consult your dealer Install the projection lens before switching on the projector Remove the lens cover first POWERON STANDBY 4
20. 6 6 lt REMOTE 1 IN terminal lt REMOTE 1 OUT gt terminal These are the terminals to connect the remote control for serial control when the system uses multiple projectors lt REMOTE 2 IN terminal This is a terminal to remotely control the projector using the external control circuit SERIAL IN terminal This is the RS 232C compatible terminal to externally control the projector by connecting a computer SERIAL OUT gt terminal This is a terminal to output the signal connected to the SERIAL IN terminal SDI IN terminal This is the terminal to input SDI signals Only for PT DZ10KE lt SDI IN 1 gt terminal lt SDI IN 2 terminal This is the terminal to input SDI signals Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE lt HDMI IN terminal This is the terminal to input HDMI signals Attention Oe EOS eC RGB 1 IN G Y 10 11 12 13 DVED IN VIDEO IN 3D SYNC B Ps C 1 IN OUT 9 10 11 12 13 RGB 1 IN lt R PR gt lt G Y gt B Pg C lt SYNC HD gt lt VD gt terminal This is a terminal to input RGB signals or the YCgCp YP gPp and Y C signals lt RGB 2 IN gt terminal This is a terminal to input RGB signals or YCgCr YPpgPp signals lt DVI D IN gt terminal This is the terminal to input DVI D signals lt VIDEO IN gt terminal This is the terminal to input video signals lt 3D SYNC 1 IN OUT gt terminal lt 3D SYNC 2 OUT gt terminal This is a terminal to
21. Right white Note The 3D test pattern cannot be displayed when the following inputs are selected VIDEO input RGB1 input only when RGB IN is set to Y C This is disabled when 3D SYSTEM SETTING is set to other than SINGLE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MESSAGE Set to show or hide the safety precautions message related to 3D viewing when the projector is switched on 1 Press A V to select SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MESSAGE 2 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button ON Shows the safety precautions message related to 3D viewing when the projector is switched on OFF Hides the safety precautions message related to 3D viewing when the projector is switched on Note e Set to OFF to hide the safety precautions message related to 3D viewing when the projector is switched on e A confirmation screen is displayed when switched from ON to OFF Press to select OK and press the ENTER button to change the setting to OFF Attention When 3D images are viewed by unspecified number of people for commercial use display the safety precautions message related to 3D viewing to notify viewers SDSAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1 1 1 Show the safety precautions message related to 3D viewing 1 Press A V to select 3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 2 Press the ENTER button The 3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS screen is displayed e P
22. v A 4 A A A A V y A4 y A A v V V v A A v A A V A A V P IN P picture in picture combination is possible A P IN P picture in picture combination is possible through the same frequency P IN P picture in picture combination is not possible 1 Only supports 480p 576p 720 60p 720 50p 1080 60i 1080 50i 1080 24sF 1080 24p 1080 25p 1080 30p 1080 50p and 1080 60p 2 VGA 640 x 480 WUXGA 1 920 x 1 200 Non interlace signal dot clock frequency 25 MHz to 162 MHz The WUXGA signal is only compatible with VESA CVT RB Reduced Blanking signals 3 480i 480p 576i 576p 720 60p 720 50p 1080 60i 1080 50i 1080 24sF 1080 24p 1080 25p 1080 30p 1080 50p 1080 60p 4 SDI only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE 5 SDI2 only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE 6 SDI only for PT DZ10KE 7 Dual link HD SDI only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE Control device password To initialize your password consult your distributor 178 ENGLISH Chapter 6 Appendix Technical information Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE If the optional Upgrade Kit Model No ET UK20 is applied the following functions are extended Function Standard status When the Upgrade Kit is applied Adjustment range of Maximum of 40 1 Maximum of 45 1 VERTICAL KEYSTONE Adjustment range of Maximum of 15 1 Maximum of 40 1 HORIZONTA
23. 0 1085 ENGLISH 43 Chapter 2 Getting Started Setting up Projection lens Model No Throw ratio Aspect ratio Projection distance L formula p Min LW L 1 4618 x SD 0 0832 i Max LT L 2 1241 x SD 0 1162 ET D75LE20 1 8 to 2 6 1 iea Min LW L 1 5924 x SD 0 0832 i Max LT L 2 3137 x SD 0 1162 45 Min LW L 2 1089 x SD 0 1131 Max LT L 4 0899 x SD 0 1765 ET D75LE30 2 6 to 5 1 1 16 8 Min LW L 2 2972 x SD 0 1131 i Max LT L 4 4552 x SD 0 1765 m Min LW L 4 0379 x SD 0 1577 Max LT L 6 4377 x SD 0 1615 ET D75LE40 5 0 to 8 0 1 16 6 Min LW L 4 3985 x SD 0 1577 i Max LT L 7 0126 x SD 0 1615 E Fixed focus lens Projection lens Model No Throw ratio Aspect ratio Projection distance L formula 4 3 L 0 6220 x SD 0 0835 ET D75LE5 0 8 1 16 9 L 0 6772 x SD 0 0835 4 3 L 0 6202 x SD 0 0713 ET D75LE50 0 8 1 16 9 L 0 6755 x SD 0 0713 For PT DW11KE B Zoom lens Projection lens Model No Throw ratio Aspect ratio Projection distance L formula Min LW L 1 3504 x SD 0 0760 1 5 to 2 0 1 16 9 Max LT L 1 8031 x SD 0 1004 ET D75LE1 Min LW L 1 6496 x SD 0 0760 2 0 to 2 7 1 4 3 Max LT L 2 2047 x SD 0 1004 Min LW L 1 8110 x SD 0 0795 2 1 to 3 1 1 16 9 Ma
24. 24 61 36 93 36 94 61 73 61 74 98 26 97 98 183 95 12 36 14 81 25 40 1000 12 453 22 138 30 60 40 88 41 07 61 62 61 63 102 97 102 98 163 83 163 56 20 64 24 73 Lens type Zoom lens Fixed focus lens Projection lens Model No ET D75LE10 ET D75LE20 ET D75LE30 ET D75LE40 ET D75LE5 ET D75LE50 Throw ratio 1 3 1 7 1 1 7 2 4 1 2 4 4 7 1 4 6 7 4 1 0 7 1 0 7 1 Projection screen size Projection distance L Height i Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max A Diagonal SD SH Width SW LW LT Lw LT w LT w LT Fixed Fixed 1 78 70 0 872 1 550 1 96 2 53 2 53 3 68 3 66 7 14 7 07 11 36 1 02 1 04 2 03 80 0 996 1 771 2 25 2 91 2 91 423 420 8 19 8 10 13 00 1 18 1 20 2 29 90 1 121 1 992 2 54 3 29 3 28 477 4 74 923 9 13 14 65 1 34 1 36 2 54 100 1 245 2 214 2 83 3 67 3 65 5 31 5 28 10 28 10 16 16 29 1 50 1 51 3 05 120 1 494 2 657 3 42 4 42 4 40 640 6 35 12 37 12 23 19 58 1 81 1 83 3 81 150 1 968 3 321 4 29 5 55 5 52 8 03 7 97 15 50 15 32 24 52 2 29 2 31 5 08 200 2 491 4 428 5 75 7 44 7 39 10 74 10 67 20 73 2048 32 75 3 08 3 10 6 35 250 3 113 5 535 7 21 9 33 9 26 13 46 13 36 25 96 25 64 40 97 3 87 3 89 7 62 300 3 736 6 641 8 67 11 21 11 13 16 17 16 06 31 18 30 80 49 20 4 66 4 68 8 89 350 4 358 7 748 10 13 13 10 12 99 18 88 1
25. 3 96 4 00 6 01 6 02 10 10 10 10 16 15 15 87 30 09 2 00 2 38 2 54 100 1 524 2 032 3 30 4 41 445 6 69 6 70 11 23 11 24 17 96 17 67 33 47 2 22 2 66 3 05 120 1 829 2 438 3 98 5 32 5 36 8 05 8 06 13 50 13 51 21 57 21 28 40 24 2 68 3 20 3 81 150 2 286 3 048 4 99 6 67 6 72 10 09 10 10 16 91 16 92 26 98 26 70 50 39 3 36 4 02 5 08 200 3 048 4 064 6 68 8 93 8 99 13 49 13 50 22 59 22 59 36 01 35 73 67 31 4 50 5 39 6 35 250 3 810 5 080 8 37 11 18 11 25 16 89 16 90 28 27 28 27 45 04 44 76 84 23 5 64 6 76 7 62 300 4 572 6 096 10 06 13 44 13 52 20 29 20 30 33 94 33 95 54 07 53 79 101 14 6 78 8 12 8 89 350 5 334 7 112 11 75 15 70 15 79 23 69 23 70 39 62 39 63 63 10 62 82 118 06 7 92 9 49 10 16 400 6 096 8 128 13 44 17 96 18 05 27 09 27 10 45 30 45 31 72 13 71 85 134 98 9 06 10 85 12 70 500 7 620 10 160 16 82 22 47 22 58 33 89 33 90 56 65 56 66 90 18 89 91 168 81 11 34 13 58 15 24 600 9 144 12 192 20 20 26 98 27 12 40 69 40 70 68 01 68 02 108 24 1107 96 202 65 13 62 16 32 25 40 1000 15 240 20 320 33 71 45 04 45 25 67 88 67 90 113 43 113 44 180 46 180 20 22 74 27 24 Lens type Zoom lens Fixed focus lens Projection lens Model No ET D75LE10 ET D75LE20 ET D75LE30 ET D75LE40 ET D75LE5 ET D75L
26. 4 77 6 94 6 89 13 40 13 25 21 21 1 98 1 99 3 81 150 1 968 3 321 4 66 6 02 5 98 8 70 8 64 16 80 16 60 26 56 2 5 2 50 5 08 200 2 491 4 428 6 24 8 06 8 01 11 64 11 56 22 46 22 19 35 46 3 36 3 36 6 35 250 3 113 5 535 7 82 10 11 10 03 14 58 14 47 28 11 27 77 44 37 4 22 4 22 7 62 300 3 736 6 641 9 40 12 15 12 05 17 51 17 39 33 77 33 36 53 27 5 08 5 08 8 89 350 4 358 7 748 10 98 14 19 14 07 20 45 20 31 39 43 38 95 62 18 5 93 10 16 400 4 981 8 855 12 56 16 23 16 10 23 39 23 23 45 09 44 53 71 09 6 79 12 70 500 6 226 11 069 15 72 20 32 20 14 29 27 29 06 56 40 55 70 88 90 8 51 15 24 600 7 472 13 283 18 88 24 41 24 18 35 15 34 90 67 72 66 88 106 71 10 22 25 40 1000 12 453 22 138 31 53 40 75 40 36 58 65 58 24 112 98 111 56 1177 96 17 09 1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection onto a 3 81 m 150 screen size ENGLISH 39 Chapter 2 Getting Started Setting up For PT DW11KE B When the screen aspect is 16 9 Unit m Lens type Zoom lens Projection lens Model No ET D75LE1 ET D75LE2 ET D75LE3 ET D75LE4 ET D75LE8 ET D75LE6 Throw ratio 1 5
27. 50 ENGLISH Chapter3 Basic Operations This chapter describes basic operations to start with ENGLISH 51 Chapter 3 Basic Operations Switching on off the projector Switching on off the projector Make sure that the supplied power cord is securely fixed to the projector body to prevent it from being removed easily Confirm that the MAIN POWER switch is on the OFF side before connecting the power cord For details of power cord handling refer to Read this first page 2 Attaching the power cord 1 Check the shapes of the AC IN terminal on the side of the projector body and the power cord connector and insert the plug completely in the correct direction until you hear the side tabs click in place Removing the power cord 1 Confirm that the MAIN POWER switch on the side of the projector body is on the OFF side and remove the power plug from the outlet 2 Remove the power cord connector from the AC IN terminal of the projector body while pressing the side tabs Displays the status of the power Check the ON G STANDBY R gt status of the power indicator before operating the projector Power indicator ON G STANDBY R gt ON G STANDBY R TIT Ju Indicator status Projector status Off The main power is switched off The power is switched off in standby mode Red Lit Projection will start when the power on
28. 6 Wait for at least eight minutes after starting projection until the lamp brightness becomes steady 7 Setall items in the PICTURE menu of all projectors to the same values 8 Adjust COLOR MATCHING to match colors 9 Display the internal test pattern All white in all projectors 10 Set BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN to 100 in all projectors 11 Set BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN to 90 in the projector with the least brightness 12 Adjust BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN in each projector Adjust BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN of all the other projectors so that the brightness is matched to the projector of which BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN is set to 90 96 13 Set MODE of BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP to AUTO and LINK to GROUP A in all projectors 14 Select APPLY of BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP and press the ENTER button in all projectors Brightness control starts Note Brightness is automatically corrected each time the lamp blinks when the power is switched on or off Adjust brightness control again when variation in brightness has increased or a lamp is replaced STANDBY MODE Set the power consumption during the standby 1 Press A V to select STANDBY MODE 2 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button NORMAL Use this setting to use the network function during standby ECO Use this setting to reduce power consumption during
29. 8 GND HDMI IN terminal pin assignments and signal names Outside view Pin No Signal name Pin No Signal name 1 T M D S data 2 11 T M D S clock shield 2 T M D S data 2 shield 12 T M D S clock vennumbersd RIRs orta to 18 3 T M D S data 2 13 CEC 2 gt 18 4 T M D S data 1 14 MISTS SISTA 5 T M D S data 1 shield 15 SCL LT BE BEBE BT B E Eg s REDDUNT 6 T M D S data 1 16 SDA DDC CEC 7 T M D S data 0 17 4 gt 19 7 ata 17 GND 8 T M D S data 0 shield 18 5 V Odd numbered pins of 1 to 19 8 EE 18 i 9 T M D S data 0 19 Hot plug detection 10 T M D S clock 48 ENGLISH Chapter 2 Getting Started Connecting DVI D IN terminal pin assignments and signal names Outside view Pin No Signal name Pin No Signal name 1 T M D S data 2 13 2 T M D S data 2 14 5V 3 T M D S data 2 4 shield 15 GND 24 47 4 16 Hot plug detection 5 17 T M D S data 0 16 __ CEERERHBI o 6 DDC clock 18 T M D S data 0 lE ni 7 DDC data 19 T M D S data 0 5 shield 8 lt 1 e e 9 T M D S data 1 21 10 T M D S clock1 22 T M D S
30. 8 54 12 70 500 7 620 10 160 19 75 25 53 25 30 36 76 36 50 70 84 69 95 111 62 10 70 15 24 600 9 144 12 192 23 72 30 66 30 38 44 14 43 83 85 04 83 98 1133 97 12 85 25 40 1000 15 240 20 320 39 59 51 17 50 68 73 64 73 12 141 85 140 07 223 40 21 46 1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection onto a 3 81 m 150 screen size ENGLISH 41 Chapter 2 Getting Started Setting up Formula to calculate projection distance per projection lens To use a screen size not listed in this manual check the screen size SD m and use the respective formula to calculate projection distance The unit of all the formulae is m Values obtained by the following calculation formulae contain a slight error For PT DZ13KE PT DZ10KE E Zoom lens Projection lens Model No Throw ratio Aspect ratio Projection distance L formula Min LW L 1 1732 x SD 0 0760 1 4 to 1 8 1 16 10 Max LT L 1 5709 x SD 0 1004 Min LW L 1 2087 x SD 0 0760 ET D75LE1 1 4 to 1 8 1 16 9 Max LT L 1 6142 x SD 0 1004 Min LW L 1 3307 x SD 0 0760 1 6 to 2 2 1 4 3 Max LT L 1 7756 x SD 0 1004 Min LW L 1 5748 x SD 0 0795 1 8 to 2 8 1 16 10 Max LT L 2 3661 x SD 0 1064 Min LW L 7 1 6220 x SD 0 0795 ET D75LE2 1 8 to
31. Chapter4 Settings DISPLAY OPTION menu 5 Press the ENTER button to switch the Select line to either luminance red green or blue Line selection items switch each time the ENTER is pressed only when the waveform monitor is displayed Select line luminance Displayed in white waveform Select line red Displayed in red waveform Select line green Displayed in green waveform Select line blue Displayed in blue waveform Note e Setting is also available from FUNCTION BUTTON 9 page 122 Waveform monitor cannot be displayed in P IN P The waveform monitor turns off when P IN P is executed during waveform monitoring The waveform monitor is not displayed when on screen display is hidden off To display the waveform monitor in 3D images use 3D WAVEFORM MONITOR Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE Adjusting the waveform Project the luminance adjustment signal of a commercial test disk 0 0 IRE or 7 5 IRE 100 100 IRE and adjust Image displayable area Signal level X Screen position 1 Select Select line luminance on the waveform monitor 2 Adjust black level Use BRIGHTNESS in the on screen menu PICTURE to adjust the black level 0 96 of the video signal to the 0 position of the waveform monitor 3 Adjust white level Use CONTRAST in the on screen menu PICTURE to adjust the w
32. Chinese Russian or Korean Note e The on screen display language of the projector is set to English by default and when ALL USER DATA 9 page 125 in INITIALIZE is executed 90 ENGLISH Chapter4 Settings 3D SETTINGS menu 3D SETTINGS menu Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE sub menu On the menu screen select 3D SETTINGS from the main menu and select an item from the Refer to Navigating through the menu page 65 for the operation of the menu screen e After selecting the item press A W b to set CD CD CD Gm Co Qm Set a picture display method for use during 3D signal input as necessary for the 3D system in use 1 Press A V to select 3D SYSTEM SETTING 2 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button During 3D signal input sequential frames of images for the right eye and images for the left eye are SINGEE alternately displayed DUAL LEFT Only images for the left eye are displayed during 3D signal input DUAL RIGHT Only images for the right eye are displayed during 3D signal input Note When 2D images are input 2D images are displayed regardless of 3D SYSTEM SETTING settings SD SYNC SETTING 1 11 Set the way in which the 3D SYNC 1 IN OUT terminal and the 3D SYNC 2 OUT gt terminal will be used Attention Before connecting external devices to the 3D
33. DEFAULT and THROUGH 1 Press A V to select ZOOM 2 Press the ENTER button The ZOOM screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select INTERLOCKED 4 Press 4b to switch the item OFF Sets the VERTICAL and HORIZONTAL zoom ratio Uses BOTH to set zoom ratio Image can be enlarged or reduced vertically and horizontally at the same magnification ON 5 Press A V to select VERTICAL or HORIZONTAL f ON is selected select BOTH 6 Press 4b to adjust Note When ASPECT is set to THROUGH ZOOM cannot be adjusted 80 ENGLISH Chapter4 Settings POSITION menu When ASPECT is set to DEFAULT 1 Press A V to select ZOOM 2 Press the ENTER button The ZOOM screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select MODE 4 Press 4b to switch the item INTERNAL Enlarges the size within the aspect range set with SCREEN FORMAT FULL Enlarges or reduces the size using the entire display area set with SCREEN FORMAT 5 Press A V to select INTERLOCKED 6 Press 4b to switch the item OFF Sets the VERTICAL and HORIZONTAL zoom ratio Uses BOTH to set zoom ratio Image can be enlarged or reduced vertically and horizontally at the same magnification ON 7 Press A V to select VERTICAL or HORIZONTAL f ON is selected select BOTH 8 Press 4b to adjust Note When ASPECT is not set to DE
34. Press A V to select LENS MEMORY Press the ENTER button Press AY to select LENS MEMORY EDIT Press the ENTER button The LENS MEMORY EDIT screen is displayed Press A V to select LENS MEMORY DELETE Press the ENTER button The LENS MEMORY DELETE screen is displayed Press A WV to select the item to delete and press the ENTER button When the confirmation screen is displayed press 4P to select OK and press the ENTER button Changing the lens memory name 1 2 3 4 Press A V to select LENS MEMORY Press the ENTER button Press A V to select LENS MEMORY EDIT Press the ENTER button The LENS MEMORY EDIT screen is displayed 124 ENGLISH Chapter4 Settings PROJECTOR SETUP menu 5 6 7 8 9 Press A V to select LENS MEMORY NAME CHANGE Press the ENTER button The LENS MEMORY NAME CHANGE screen is displayed Press A V to select the name to change and press the ENTER button The LENS MEMORY NAME INPUT screen is displayed Press A VW 4b to select the text and press the ENTER button to enter the text After the name is changed press A W b to select OK and press the ENTER button The registration completes and returns to the LENS MEMORY NAME CHANGE screen e f you press A Wp to select CANCEL and then press the ENTER button the changed name will not be registered f you press A V b to select DEFAULT and
35. Projector status Network status Status Projector control Detailed setup Change password CRESTRON RoomView Access error log x amp Projector control window x Access log Note Access error log Access log will display the recent few thousand accesses requests All information may not be displayed when many accesses requests are made at one time When Access error log Access log exceeds a certain amount old information will be deleted Check Access error log Access log periodically 144 ENGLISH Chapter 4 Settings NETWORK menu Basic control page Click Projector control Basic control ENNENI 4 i nttp 192 198 0 8 cg in main cgi7page MENU_PROJ_CTL amp lang e P BS XP Sprojector control window x n gen SELECTOR j 4 5 POWER 3 OSD Turns on off the power Switches on display off hide the on screen display function SHUTTER 4 SYSTEM Switches the setting whether to use the shutter function Switches the system method closing opening of the shutter 5 INPUT SELECT Detail control page Click Projector control Detail control amp http 192 188 0 8 cgi bin main cai page DETAIL CTL amp lang e Switches the input signal 8 X amp Projector control window x AUTO SETUP MENU a ENTER Ob v DEFAULT ASPECT
36. The default value is 60 minutes In this case another E mail will not be sent for 60 minutes after sending the temperature warning E mail even if it reaches the warning temperature INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Change the temperature setting for the temperature warning mail A temperature warning E mail is sent when the temperature exceeds this value Chapter 4 Settings NETWORK menu B http 192 1680 8 cgi bin main cg page MAIL SET amp lang e P BS X Projector control window x ios B http 192 168 0 8 cgi bin main cgi page MAIL SET amp lang e P BS X amp Projector control window x E MAIL ADDRESS 2 9 SIMPLE Proje MAIL CONTENTS ERROR LAMP1 RUNTIME at REMAIN ER 5 tri LAMP RUNTIME LAMP1 RUNTIME at REMAIN EXO Ei LAMP1 RUNTIME at REMAIN E ord LAMP2 RUNTIME at REMALN EXO F8 E password LAMP2 RUNTIME at REMAIN QE pi LAMP2 RUNTIME at REMAIN H LAMP2 RUNTIME o Ex Woo Ei INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Ro E INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Lan y9 7 E MAIL ADDRESS 1 E MAIL ADDRESS 2 8 Settings of the conditions to send E mail Enter the E mail address to be sent Leave E MAIL ADDRESS Select the conditions to send E mail 2 blank when two E mail addresses are not to be used MAIL CONTENTS Select either NORMAL or SIMPLE ERROR Send an E mail when an error occurred in the self diagnosis LAMP1 RUNTIME An E mail message is sent when the remaining lamp on time for the lamp 1 ha
37. The menu items that cannot be adjusted or used are shown in gray characters and they cannot be selected e Sub menu items and factory default settings differ depending on the selected input terminal 70 ENGLISH Chapter4 Settings PICTURE menu PICTURE menu On the menu screen select PICTURE from the main menu and select an item from the sub menu Refer to Navigating through the menu page 65 for the operation of the menu screen e After selecting the item press A V b to set You can switch to the desired picture mode suitable for the image source and the environment in which the projector is used 1 Press A V to select PICTURE MODE 2 Press the 4b The PICTURE MODE individual adjustment screen is displayed 3 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button STANDARD The image becomes suitable for moving images in general CINEMA The image becomes suitable for movie contents NATURAL The image is sRGB compliant DICOM SIM The image becomes similar to that of DICOM Part 14 Grayscale Standard DYNAMIC The light output is maximized for use in bright areas GRAPHIC The image becomes suitable for input from the personal computer USER Set any desired picture mode Note The factory default picture mode is GRAPHIC for still image input signals and STANDARD for movie based input signals
38. To display images in 2D set 3D INPUT FORMAT to NATIVE 8 VESA CVT RB Reduced Blanking compliant 9 Only for PT DW11KE 10 Samples the pixels in the image processing circuit and projects the image 11 Only for PT DZ13KE PT DZ10KE Note There are 1 920 x 1 080 display dots for PT DZ13KE and PT DZ10KE 1 400 x 1 050 for PT DS12KE and 1 366 x 768 for PT DW11KE A signal with a different resolution is converted to the number of display dots The i at the end of the resolution indicates an interlaced signal When interlaced signals are connected flickering may occur on the projected image List of 3D compatible signals Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE The following table specifies the 3D compatible video signals that the projector can project Items that are applicable to 1 to 10 in the table are as follows 1 Frame packing system 2 Side by side system 3 Top and bottom system 4 Line by line system 5 Frame sequential system 6 3G SDI Level B simultaneous system 7 HDMI amp DVI D 8 RGB1 amp RGB2 9 SDI1 amp SDI2 only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE 10 Simultaneous system 3D compatible Resolution es E ue e signal Dots kHz Hz MHz 1 2 3 5 2 3 4 5 750 720 60p 1 280 x 720 45 0 60 0 74 3 4 V 4 a v V v 750 720 50p 1 280 x 720 37 5 50 0 74 3 4 4 V v A V 1080 60i 1 920 x 1 080i 33 8 60 0 74 3 V 4 V A4 1080 50i 1 920 x 1 080i 28 1 50
39. confirmation screen is displayed 2 Press 4b to select OK and press the ENTER button Or press the power standby lt gt button again Projection of the image will stop and the power indicator ON G STANDBY R gt on the projector body lights in orange The fan keeps running 3 Wait until the power indicator ON G STANDBY R gt on the projector body lights in red and the fan stops for 170 seconds 4 Press the OFF side of the MAIN POWER switch to turn off the power Note Do not switch on the projector and project images immediately after switching off the projector Turning on the power while the lamp is still hot may shorten the lamp life For about 75 seconds after the projector is switched off and the luminous lamp cooling is started the lamp indicators will not light up even if the power is switched on Even after 75 seconds the lamp may not light up if the projector is switched on In such a case after the power indicator ON G STANDBY R gt lights in red switch on the projector again The projector consumes power even when the power standby o button is pressed and the projector is switched off if the main power of the projector is on When the PROJECTOR SETUP menu STANDBY MODE is set to ECO use of some functions is restricted but the power consumption during standby can be conserved Even if the main power MAIN POWER switch is turned OFF during projection or im
40. from the sub menu Refer to Navigating through the menu page 65 for the operation of the menu screen e After selecting the item press A V b to set The projector has an ID number setting function that can be used when multiple projectors are used side by side to enable simultaneous control or individual control via a single remote control 1 Press A V to select PROJECTOR ID 2 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button ALL Select when controlling projectors without specifying an ID number 1 64 Select when specifying an ID number to control individual projector Note To specify an ID number for individual control the ID number of a remote control must match the ID number of the projector When the ID number is set to ALL the projector will operate regardless of the ID number specified during remote control or computer control If multiple projectors are set up side by side with IDs set to ALL they cannot be controlled separately from the projectors with other ID numbers e Refer to Setting the remote control ID numbers page 28 for how to set the ID number on the remote control PROJECTION METHOD 1 Set the projection method in accordance with the installation status of the projector Change the projection method if the screen display is upside down or inverted 1 Press A V to select PROJECTION METHOD 2 Press th
41. or longer l 100 mm 4 or longer Do not install the projector in a confined space When it is necessary to install the projector in a confined space install the air conditioning or ventilation separately Exhaust heat may accumulate when the ventilation is not enough triggering the protection circuit of the projector When using this product take safety measures against the following incidents Personal information being leaked via this product Unauthorized operation of this product by a malicious third party Interfering or stopping of this product by a malicious third party Take sufficient security measures pages 133 153 Make your password difficult to guess as much as possible Change your password periodically Panasonic Corporation or its affiliate companies will never ask for your password directly Do not divulge your password in case you receive such inquiries The connecting network must be secured by a firewall etc e Set a password for the web control and restrict the users who can log in Art Net is an Ethernet communication protocol based on the TCP IP protocol By using the DMX controller or application software illumination and stage system can be controlled Art Net is made based on DMX512 communication protocol To dispose of the product ask your local authorities or de
42. while inputting the signal to be adjusted SD PICTURE BALANCE gt 1 1 Correct a shift when the brightness or color differ in the right eye and left eye images 1 Press A V to select 3D PICTURE BALANCE 2 Press the ENTER button The 3D PICTURE BALANCE screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select an item and press 4P to adjust the setting Correct the setting value parts of the right eye image based on the left eye image For 3D WAVEFORM MONITOR the left eye and right eye images are divided and displayed in a waveform on the left and right CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast of the colors SE EALAR E Adjusts the high red white balance RED WHITE BALANCE HIGH GREEN Adjusts the high green white balance WHITE BALANCE HIGH F BLUE Adjusts the high blue white balance BRIGHTNESS Adjusts the dark black part of the projected image WHITE BALANCE LOW RED Adjusts the low red white balance WHITE BALANCE LOW Adjusts the low green white balance GREEN WHITE a Low Adjusts the low blue white balance COLOR Adjusts the color saturation of the projected image TINT Adjusts the skin tone in the projected image CLOCK PHASE Adjusts when the screen flickers or outline blurs ENGLISH 93 Chapter4 Settings 3D SETTINGS menu OFF Hides the 3D waveform monitor ON Displays the 3D waveform monitor 3D WAVEFORM MONITOR
43. while the image of the secondary input is displayed the primary input becomes the backup input If the inputs of DVI D and HDMI are switched while BACKUP INPUT MODE is set to ON or 1 and switching to the backup input signal is possible the input is switched seamlessly If the inputs of SDI1 and SDI2 are switched while BACKUP INPUT MODE is set to 2 and switching to the backup input signal is possible the input is switched seamlessly When AUTOMATIC SWITCHING is set to ENABLE and BACKUP INPUT STATUS is ACTIVE the signal is switched to the backup input if the input signal is disrupted When AUTOMATIC SWITCHING is set to ENABLE and the signal is automatically switched to the backup input due to disruption of the input signal BACKUP INPUT STATUS changes to INACTIVE In this case switching to the backup input signal is not possible until the original input signal is restored If the signal is automatically switched to the backup input switching to the backup input signal becomes possible when the original input signal is restored In this case the current input is retained BACKUP INPUT SETTING cannot be set during P IN P The backup operation is not performed either BACKUP INPUT SETTING cannot be set when 3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING is set to AUTO The backup operation is not performed either BACKUP INPUT SETTING cannot be set when SDI LINK is set to DUAL LINK The backup operation is not performed either
44. 1 050 54 1 50 0 99 9 Je ee eem eeJ euw iw l 1 400 x 1 050 64 0 60 0 108 0 Jem os cee ee RR mee KY cme SXGA 1 400 x 1 050 65 2 60 0 122 6 Ke fj HS S HS Vv KS 1 400 x 1 050 65 3 60 0 121 8 S S SS SS E HS P 1 440 x 900 55 9 59 9 106 5 vC mS S me ts m m e om mm WXGA 1 440 x 900 46 3 49 9 86 8 Fy ee end lll ee De UXGA60 1 600 x 1 200 75 0 60 0 162 0 EIE ee ee ee m s 1 680 x 1 050 65 3 60 0 146 3 MEME EE Er WSXGA 1 680 x 1 050 54 1 50 0 119 5 s ee p eme 1 920 x 1 080 55 6 49 9 141 5 f f SS Ss S je 1920 x 1080 1 920 x 1 08072 66 6 59 9 138 5 vom m m cms iS m m S m 1 920 x 1 200 61 8 49 9 158 3 V i iv wxv WUXGA 1 920 x 1 2007 74 0 60 0 154 0 Vi vi vi ivi 1 Supports half 2 VESA CVT RB Reduced Blanking compliant 3 Only supports SDI1 ENGLISH 183 Chapter 6 Appendix Specifications The specifications of the projector are as follows Power supply AC 220 V 240 V 50 Hz 60 Hz PT DZ13KE 970 W 5 A PT DS12KE PT DW11KE 950 W 4 8 A Power consumption PT DZ10KE 900 W 4 7 A 0 3 W when STANDBY MODE is set to ECO 9 W when STANDBY MODE is set to NORMAL PT DZ13KE PT DZ10KE 24 4 mm 0 96 aspect ratio 16 10 Size PT DS12KE 24 1 mm 0 95 aspect ratio 4 3 PT DW11KE 21 6 mm 0 85 aspect ratio 16 9 DLP chip Display sy
45. 16 10 L 7 0 6072 x SD 0 0713 ET D75LE50 0 7 1 16 9 L 7 0 6240 x SD 0 0713 0 8 1 4 3 L 0 6873 x SD 0 0713 For PT DS12KE E Zoom lens Projection lens Model No Throw ratio Aspect ratio Projection distance L formula Min LW L 1 2087 x SD 0 0760 f Max LT L 1 6142 x SD 0 1004 ET D75LE1 1 5 to 2 0 1 160 Min LW L 1 3150 x SD 0 0760 i Max LT L 1 7559 x SD 0 1004 45 Min LW L 1 6220 x SD 0 0795 i Max LT L 2 4291 x SD 0 1064 ET D75LE2 2 0 to 3 0 1 d Min LW L 1 7638 x SD 0 0795 i Max LT L 2 6457 x SD 0 1064 Min LW L 2 4291 x SD 0 0958 i Max LT L 4 0591 x SD 0 1216 ET D75LE3 3 0 to 5 0 1 T Min LW L 2 6457 x SD 0 0958 Max LT L 4 4213 x SD 0 1216 4 Min LW L 7 4 0591 x SD 0 1158 i Max LT L 6 4528 x SD 0 1013 ET D75LE4 5 0 to 8 0 1 16 8 Min LW L 4 4213 x SD 0 1158 Max LT L 7 0315 x SD 0 1013 Min LW L 7 6 4567 x SD 0 3862 7 9 to 15 0 1 4 3 Max LT L 12 0945 x SD 0 3598 ET D75LE8 Min LW L 7 0315 x SD 0 3862 8 0 to 15 0 1 16 9 Max LT L 13 1732 x SD 0 3598 45 Min LW L 0 8150 x SD 0 0566 i Max LT L 0 9764 x SD 0 0736 ET D75LE6 1 0 to 1 2 1 16 8 Min LW L 0 8858 x SD 0 0566 i Max LT L 1 0630 x SD 0 0736 43 Min LW L 1 1425 x SD 0 0857 Max LT L 1 4767 x SD 0 1085 ET D75LE10 1 4 to 1 8 1 18 8 Min LW L 1 2446 x SD 0 0857 i Max LT L 1 6086 x SD
46. 2 0 1 2 1 3 1 1 3 1 5 2 1 5 2 8 2 1 8 2 15 4 1 1 0 1 2 1 Projection screen size Projection distance L Height Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Diagonal SD sey Width SW aw v aw rr iw LT aw LT aw LT aw LT 1 78 70 0 872 1 550 2 32 3 10 3 14 4 72 4 73 7 94 7 94 12 71 12 43 23 65 1 56 1 87 2 03 80 0 996 1 771 2 66 3 56 3 60 5 41 5 42 9 09 9 09 14 54 14 26 27 08 1 79 2 14 2 29 90 1 121 1 992 3 01 4 02 4 06 6 10 6 11 10 24 10 25 16 37 16 09 30 51 2 02 242 2 54 100 1 245 2 214 3 35 4 48 4 52 6 79 6 80 11 39 11 40 18 21 17 92 33 94 225 2 70 3 05 120 1 494 2 657 4 03 5 39 5 44 8 17 8 18 13 69 13 70 21 87 21 58 40 80 2 72 325 3 81 150 1 868 3 321 5 06 6 76 6 81 10 23 10 24 17 15 17 15 27 36 27 08 51 09 3 41 4 08 5 08 200 2 491 4 428 6 77 9 05 9 11 13 68 13 69 22 90 22 91 36 51 36 23 68 25 4 56 5 47 6 35 250 3 113 5 535 8 49 11 34 11 41 17 13 17 14 28 66 28 67 45 67 45 39 85 40 5 72 6 85 7 62 300 3 736 6 641 10 20 13 63 13 71 20 57 20 58 34 42 34 42 54 82 54 54 102 55 6 87 8 24 8 89 350 4 358 7 748 11 91 15 92 16 00 24 02 24 03 40 17 40 18 63 97 63 70 119 70 8 03 9 62 10 16 400 4 981 8 855 13 63 18 21 18 30 27 47 27 48 45 9
47. 24 31 HDMI 32 39 No operation 40 47 SDI1 only for PT DZ13KE 48 55 2 Input selection PT DS12KE PT DZ10KE 0 SDI2 only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE 3063 No operation 64 127 Execute P IN P USER1 128 135 Execute P IN P USER2 136 143 Execute P IN P USER3 144 151 No operation 152 255 No operation 0 31 Move to the home position 32 63 us Move to 1 LENS MEMORY1 64 95 3 Lens position 0 Move to 2 LENS MEMORY2 96 127 Move to 3 LENS MEMORY3 128 159 No operation 160 191 High speed 0 31 4 Lens H shift See Lens Low speed 32 63 adjustment Fi l i oe 64 95 5 Lens V shift adjustment Adjustment stop 96 159 128 FS 160 191 6 Lens focus Lens adjustment adjustment Low speed 192 223 7 Lens zoom High speed 224 255 Standby 0 63 8 Power supply control No operation 64 191 128 Power on 192 255 OFF 0 15 KEYSTONE 16 31 Only for PT DZ13KE CURVED 32 47 PT DS12KE PC 1 48 63 hs 9 GEOMETRY 255 To use PC 1 PC 2 and PC 2 64 79 PC 3 the optional Upgrade PC 3 80 95 Kit Model No ET UK20 is required CORNER CORRECTION 96 111 No operation 112 255 170 ENGLISH Chapter 6 Appendix Technical information Channel Control details Performance Parameter Initial value Remark DE el Only for PT DZ13KE Pea 32 63 PT DS12KE 10 CUSTOM MASKING PC 2 64 95 255 To use this function the PC 3 96 127 optional Upgrade Kit Model No opera
48. 259 compliant SMPTE ST 292 compliant SMPTE ST 424 compliant SMPTE ST 372 compliant lt SDI IN 2 gt terminal Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE 1 set BNC SD SDI signal HD SDI signal Dual link HD SDI LINK B signal SMPTE ST 259 compliant SMPTE ST 292 compliant SMPTE ST 372 compliant lt 3D SYNC 1 IN OUT gt terminal Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE 1 set BNC During input setting During output setting TTL high impedance TTL output Maximum 10 mA 3D SYNC 2 OUT gt terminal Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE SERIAL IN SERIAL OUT terminal 1 set BNC TTL output Maximum 10 mA D Sub 9 p 1 set each RS 232C compliant for computer control lt REMOTE 1 IN gt lt REMOTE 1 OUT gt terminal M3 stereo mini jack cable 1 set each for remote control wired projector connection control lt REMOTE 2 IN gt terminal LAN terminal 1 set D Sub 9 p for contact control 1 set RJ 45 for network connection PJLink compatible 10Base T 100Base TX Art Net compatible 1 Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE Note The model numbers of accessories and optional components are subject to change without prior notice 186 ENGLISH Chapter 6 Appendix Dimensions Dimensions Unit mm Ly r xi a o t i o e 2 anas as ire gena w ee x
49. 3 Set the MAIN POWER switch to OFF and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet Wait at least one hour and check if the lamp unit has cooled down Remove the lamp unit cover Fig 1 Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the lamp unit cover fixing screw x1 counterclockwise until it turns freely and open the lamp unit cover slowly in the direction of the arrow Opening the lamp unit cover quickly may result in damage to the cover f you loosen the lamp unit cover fixing screw with the projector installed upward in the vertical direction the lamp unit cover may open on its weight and the lamp unit may be dropped off Hold the lamp unit cover securely and slide it in the direction of the arrow and then pull it out backward to remove e Fan and other components are attached to the lamp unit cover handle the removed lamp unit cover with care Remove the lamp unit Fig 2 Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the lamp unit fixing screws x2 counterclockwise until they turn freely and then remove the lamp unit Hold the handles of the lamp unit and remove it in the horizontal direction Do not remove the screws other than the lamp unit fixing screws Push in the new lamp unit while paying attention to the insertion position Fig 3 Push the guides to attach the lamp unit slowly into the projector body along the grooves for guide to attach the lamp unit e f the lamp unit is not installed properly remove it
50. 30 140 83 140 83 224 03 223 77 28 22 33 84 Lens type Zoom lens Fixed focus lens Projection lens Model No ET D75LE10 ET D75LE20 ET D75LE30 ET D75LE40 ET D75LE5 ET D75LE50 Throw ratio 1 9 2 5 1 2 5 3 6 1 3 6 6 9 1 6 8 10 9 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 Projection screen size Projection distance L Height Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max 3 A Diagonal SD SH Width SW LW LT Lw LT w LT w LT Fixed Fixed 1 78 70 1 067 1 422 2 69 3 48 3 47 5 05 5 01 9 77 9 66 15 49 1 43 1 44 2 03 80 1 219 1 626 3 09 3 99 3 98 5 78 5 75 11 19 11 06 17 72 1 64 1 65 2 29 90 1 372 1 829 3 49 4 51 4 49 6 52 648 12 61 12 46 19 96 1 86 1 87 2 54 100 1 524 2 032 3 88 5 02 4 99 7 26 7 21 14 03 13 86 22 19 2 08 2 08 3 05 120 1 829 2 438 4 68 6 05 6 01 8 74 8 68 16 87 16 67 26 67 2 51 2 51 3 81 150 2 286 3 048 5 87 7 58 7 53 10 95 10 87 21 13 20 88 33 37 3 16 3 16 5 08 200 3 048 4 064 7 85 10 15 10 07 14 64 14 53 28 23 27 89 44 55 4 24 4 24 6 35 250 3 810 5 080 9 83 12 71 12 61 18 32 18 20 35 33 34 90 55 73 5 32 5 31 7 62 300 4 572 6 096 11 82 15 28 15 15 22 01 21 86 42 43 41 91 66 91 6 40 6 39 8 89 350 5 334 7 112 13 80 17 84 17 68 25 70 25 52 49 53 48 92 78 08 7 47 10 16 400 6 096 8 128 15 78 20 40 20 22 29 39 29 18 56 64 55 93 89 26
51. AAIR6 battery 2 Power cord 1 TXFSX01RGRZ For remote control unit Lens fixing screw 1 XYN4 J18FJ S Power cord lt 1 gt TXFSXO2RGRZ Attention After unpacking the projector discard the power cord cap and packaging material properly Do not use the supplied power cord for devices other than this projector For missing accessories consult your dealer Store small parts in an appropriate manner and keep them away from small children Note The model numbers of accessories are subject to change without prior notice Contents of the supplied CD ROM The contents of the supplied CD ROM are as follows Instruction list PDF Operating Instructions Functional Manual Multi Projector Monitoring amp Control Software Operating Instructions Logo Transfer Software Operating Instructions List of Compatible Projector This is a list of projectors that are compatible with the software Models contained in the CD ROM and their restrictions Software license GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Software Multi Projector Monitoring amp This software allows you to monitor and control multiple Control Software Windows projectors connected to the LAN Logo Transfer Software This software allows you to transfer original images such as Windows company logos to be displayed when projection starts to the projector 20 ENG
52. Accidentally swallowing them can cause physical harm e f you believe that parts have been swallowed seek medical advice immediately Remove the depleted batteries from the remote control promptly e Leaving them in the unit may result in fluid leakage overheating or explosion of the batteries 6 ENGLISH Read this first CAUTION E POWER When disconnecting the power cord be sure to hold the power plug and power connector If the power cord itself is pulled the lead will become damaged and fire short circuits or serious electric shocks will result When not using the projector for an extended period of time disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet Failure to do so may result in fire or electric shock Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet before carrying out any cleaning and replacing the unit Failure to do so may result in electric shock B ONUSE INSTALLATION Do not place heavy objects on top of the projector Failure to observe this will cause the projector to become unbalanced and fall which could result in damage or injury The projector will be damaged or deformed Do not put your weight on this projector You could fall or the projector could break and injury will result e Be especially careful not to let young children stand or sit on the projector Do not place the projector in extremely hot locations Doing so will cause the outer casing or internal components to deterior
53. CANCEL The lens moves up down left and right to automatically set the lens shift limit values and home position The lens stops to complete the calibration Note e PROGRESS is displayed on the menu during lens calibration Cannot cancel mid operation When lens calibration executes correctly COMPLETE is displayed and INCOMPLETE is displayed when it does not execute correctly Pressing the FOCUS button on the remote control for at least three seconds will also display the confirmation screen for lens calibration execution LENS MEMORY 2 2 2 Save and load the focus position shift position and zoom position of an adjusted lens Saving lens position 1 Press A V to select LENS MEMORY 2 Press the ENTER button 3 Press A V to select LENS MEMORY SAVE 4 Press the ENTER button The LENS MEMORY SAVE screen is displayed 5 Press A V to select the item to save and press the ENTER button ENGLISH 123 Chapter4 Settings PROJECTOR SETUP menu 6 7 8 When the confirmation screen is displayed press 4P to select OK and press the ENTER button The LENS MEMORY NAME INPUT screen is displayed Press A V 4 to select the text and press the ENTER button to enter the text After the name is input press A V lt gt to select OK and press the ENTER button The registration completes and returns to the LENS MEMORY SAVE screen e f
54. Clearance 5 mm 3 16 or longer Ensure the inflow of air into the air intake port Otherwise the projector may not work properly The adjustable feet can be removed if not needed in the installation However do not use the screw holes where the adjustable feet were removed to fix the projector in place Also do not install other screws in the screw holes of adjustable feet Doing so may damage the projector Note that the length of the front feet differ from that of the rear feet when attaching the removed adjustable feet The ones with a longer screw are for the front Length of the screw for front feet 65 mm 2 9 16 length of the screw for rear feet 23 mm 29 32 Use the adjustable feet only for the floor standing installation and for adjusting the angle Using them for other purposes may damage the projector Do not stack projectors on top of each other Do not use the projector supporting it by the top e Do not use the projector tilted at an angle that exceeds 15 from the horizontal plane Do not block the ventilation ports intake and exhaust of the projector ENGLISH 17 Chapter 1 Preparation Precautions for use Prevent hot and cool air from the air conditioning system to blow directly to the ventilation ports intake and exhaust of the projector 500 mm 20
55. D75LE3 45 40 20 15 0 4 0 8 0 3 0 5 ET D75LE4 45 40 20 15 0 3 0 5 0 2 0 3 ET D75LE5 22 15 8 8 1 5 3 7 0 9 2 2 ET D75LE6 28 15 10 10 1 2 3 0 0 7 1 7 ET D75LE8 45 40 20 15 0 2 0 3 0 1 0 2 ET D75LE10 40 40 20 15 0 9 2 0 0 5 1 1 ET D75LE20 40 40 20 15 0 7 1 3 0 4 0 7 ET D75LE30 45 40 20 15 0 5 0 9 0 3 0 5 ET D75LE40 45 40 20 15 0 3 0 5 0 2 0 3 ET D75LE50 22 15 8 8 1 5 3 7 0 9 2 2 1 Cannot correct VERTICAL KEYSTONE and HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE if the total exceeds 55 when used at the same time Note When GEOMETRY is used the focus of the entire screen may be lost as correction increases Make the curved screen a circular arc shape with one part of a perfect circle removed Adjustment range of the GEOMETRY items may not match the listed projection range depending on the projection lens Use this projector within the projection range otherwise the correction may not work 34 ENGLISH Chapter 2 Getting Started Setting up Projection distance of each projection lens A x5 error in listed projection distances may occur In addition when GEOMETRY and KEYSTONE are used distance is corrected to become smaller than the specified screen size For PT DZ13KE PT DZ10KE B When the screen aspect is 16 10
56. DZ10KE Note To predict when to replace the lamp check the lamp runtime displayed in LAMP 1 and LAMP2 in STATUS page 120 2 500 hours and 3 500 hours are estimated duration before replacement and is not guaranteed The estimated duration before replacing the Replacement lamp unit for portrait mode is 500 hours The on screen message for replacing the lamp appears after 300 hours ENGLISH 163 Chapter 5 Maintenance Maintenance replacement How to replace the lamp unit Attention 1 2 3 4 When the projector is mounted on the ceiling do not conduct work while your face is near the lamp unit Do not remove or loosen the screws other than specified ones when replacing the lamp unit Use same type of lamp unit for both lamps When replacing the lamp unit loosen the lamp unit cover fixing screw while putting your hand on Lamp unit cover Grooves for the guide to attach the lamp unit S Bae E E E E E B Lamp unit cover fixing screw Fig 1 Guide to attach the Lamp unit 2 lamp unit Handles Lamp unit 1 a A ae Fan power connector Lamp unit fixing screws Grooves for the guide to attach the lamp unit Fig 2 Fig
57. EN 100 3 15 16 462 18 3 16 530 20 7 8 26 1 1 32 468 18 7 16 le Actual dimensions may differ depending on the product ENGLISH 187 Chapter 6 Appendix Precautions for Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors Precautions for Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors When installing the projector to a ceiling be sure to use the specified optional Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors Model No ET PKD310H for High Ceilings ET PKD310S for Low Ceilings ET PAD310 Projector ceiling mount bracket When installing the projector attach the drop prevention kit included with the Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors Ask a qualified technician to do the installation work such as mounting the projector on the ceiling e Panasonic takes no responsibility for any damage to the projector resulting from use of a ceiling mount bracket not manufactured by Panasonic or the inappropriate choice of location for installation even if the warranty period of the projector has not expired Unused products must be removed promptly by a qualified technician Use a torque screwdriver or Allen torque wrench to tighten bolts to their specified tightening torques Do not use electric screwdrivers or impact screwdrivers Read the Installation Instructions for the Ceiling Mount Bracket for
58. ENGLISH 173 Chapter 6 Appendix Technical information D Sub 9 pin male Outside view Pin No Signal name Details 1 NC 1 5 2 RXD Received data 3 TXD Transmitted data 4 NC 5 GND Earth 6 NC 7 RTS 6 9 8 CTS Connected internally 9 NC Communication conditions Factory default Signal level RS 232C compliant Sync method Asynchronous Baud rate 9 600 bps Parity None Character length 8 bits Stop bit 1 bit X parameter None S parameter None Basic format Transmission from the computer starts with STX then the ID command parameter and ETX are sent in this order Add parameters according to the details of control ID designate ZZ 01 to 06 n pie 2 bytes Pei c2 c3 Ese e Ce End 1 byte s undefined length Colon 1 byte 3 command characters 3 S Semi colon 1 byte 2 ID characters 2 bytes Start 1 byte Basic format has subcommands Same as the basic format E PIENE P1 P2 Pa Pa P5 Pe Parameter 6 bytes Sub command 5 bytes Symbol or bytes 1 byte and setting or adjustment value 5 Operation 1 byte Set the value specified using parameter 1 When transmitting a command which does not need a parameter an operation E and paramet
59. FUNCTION BUTTON page 122 The projector has eight types of internal test patterns to check the condition of the set To display test patterns perform the following steps TESTPATTERN button 1 Press the TEST button 2 Press 4b to select the test pattern Note e Setting is also available from the TEST PATTERN gt page 129 menu e Settings of position size and other factors will not be reflected in test patterns Make sure to display the input signal before performing various adjustments You can toggle through aspect ratios to select the one that is appropriate for the input signal nc button 1 Press the ASPECT button The setting will change each time you press the button e Refer to ASPECT page 79 for details ENGLISH 63 Chapter4 Settings This chapter describes the settings and adjustments you can make using the on screen menu 64 ENGLISH Chapter 4 Settings Menu navigation Menu navigation The on screen menu Menu is used to perform various settings and adjustments of the projector Operating procedure button 1 Press the MENU button on the remote control or control panel The MAIN MENU screen is displayed L8 PICTURE MENUSELECT SUB MENU 2 Press A V to select an item from the main menu The selected item is highlighted in yellow MENU SELECT SUB MENU 3 Press the ENTER button The sub menu items of the selected ma
60. L 2 9040 x SD 0 1162 Min LW L 2 3550 x SD 0 1131 2 7 to 5 2 1 16 9 Max LT L 4 5673 x SD 0 1765 ET D75LE30 Min LW L 2 8833 x SD 0 1131 3 6 to 6 9 1 4 3 Max LT L 5 5917 x SD 0 1765 Min LW L 4 5092 x SD 0 1577 5 1 to 8 2 1 16 9 Max LT L 7 1891 x SD 0 1615 ET D75LE40 Min LW L 5 5206 x SD 0 1577 6 8 to 10 9 1 4 3 Max LT L 8 8016 x SD 0 1615 E Fixed focus lens Projection lens Model No Throw ratio Aspect ratio Projection distance L formula 0 8 1 16 9 L 7 0 6929 x SD 0 0835 ET D75LE5 1 0 1 4 3 L 0 8504 x SD 0 0835 0 8 1 16 9 L 7 0 6925 x SD 0 0713 ET D75LE50 1 0 1 4 3 L 7 0 8479 x SD 0 0713 Install the projector on a flat surface so that the front of the projector is parallel to the screen surface and the projection screen is rectangular If the screen is tilted downward the projection screen can be adjusted to be rectangular by adjusting the front adjustable feet The adjustable feet can also be used to adjust the projector to be level when it is tilted in the horizontal direction Extend the adjustable feet by rotating in the direction shown in the figure and retract by rotating in the opposite direction Adjustable amount p Front adjustable feet Approx 50 mm 1 31 32 ay iil Rear adjustable feet Approx 10 mm 13 32 V Attention e Heated air is expelled from the air exhaust port while t
61. OK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE OK OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE OK AROUND LAMP TEMPERATURE OK LAMP1 REMAIN TIME OK LAMP2 REMAIN TIME OK LAMP1 STATUS FAILED LAMP2 STATUS FAILED APERTURE CONTRAST SHUTTER OK INTAKE AIR TEMP SENSOR OK OPTICS MODULE TEMP SENSOR OK AROUND LAMP TEMP SENSOR OK BATTERY OK LENS MOUNTER OK COVER OPEN FAILED BRIGHTNESS SENSOR OK ANGLE SENSOR OK FILTER UNIT OK AIR FILTER OK AC POWER OK Error code 00 00 00 60 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 23 00 00 00 Intake air temperature 27 degC 80 degF Optics module temperature 33 degC 91 degF Around lamp temperature 32 degC 89 degF PROJECTOR RUNTIME 200H POWER ON 1 times LAMP1 ON 1 times LAMP1 LOW 200 H LAMP1 MID OH LAMP1 HIGH OH LAMP1 REMAIN 1800 H LAMP2 ON 1 times LAMP2 LOW 200 H LAMP2 MID OH LAMP2 HIGH OH LAMP2 REMAIN 1800 H d Current status MAIN VERSION 1 00 NETWORK VERSION 1 00 SUB VERSION 1 00 LAMP STATUS LAMP1 ON LAMP2 ON INPUT RGB1 REMOTE2 STATUS DISABLE Wired Network configuration DHCP Client OFF IP address 192 168 0 8 MAC address 70 85 12 00 00 00 Fri Nov 01 16 50 14 2013 152 ENGLISH Chapter 4 Settings NETWORK menu Change password page Click Change password B http 192 168 0 8 cgi bin main cai page MENU PASS CHANGESUanc D B X amp Projector control wind
62. OPTION menu OFF Does not hold the cursor position Note e Even if OSD MEMORY is set to ON the cursor position will not be held when the MAIN POWER switch of the projector body is turned OFF Setting INPUT GUIDE Set whether to display the input guide input terminal name signal name memory number and BACKUP INPUT STATUS currently selected in the position set in OSD POSITION 1 Press A V to select ON SCREEN DISPLAY 2 Press the lt ENTER gt button The ON SCREEN DISPLAY screen is displayed 3 Press AY to select INPUT GUIDE 4 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button ON Displays the input guide OFF Hides the input guide Setting WARNING MESSAGE Set the display hide of the warning message 1 Press A V to select ON SCREEN DISPLAY 2 Press the ENTER button The ON SCREEN DISPLAY screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select WARNING MESSAGE 4 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button ON Displays the warning message OFF Hides the warning message BACK COLOR JJ 9 2 0 Set the display of the projected screen when there is no signal input 1 Press A V to select BACK COLOR 2 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button BLUE Displays the entire pro
63. PT DZ10KE Tet eee You can display the status of the projector button 1 Press the lt STATUS gt button The STATUS screen is displayed 27 C 80 F 33 C 92 F 33 C 92 F SEND STATUS VIA E MAIL 4 gt CHANGE cD EXIT Note a e This can be displayed from the PROJECTOR SETUP menu STATUS 9 page 120 TN e The automatic setup function can be used to automatically adjust the resolution clock phase and image position when analog RGB signals consisting of bitmap images such as computer signals are being input or to automatically adjust the image position when DVI D HDMI signals are input Supplying images with bright white borders at the edges and high contrast black and white characters is recommended when the system is in automatic adjustment mode Avoid supplying images that include halftones or gradation such as photographs and computer graphics button 1 Press the AUTO SETUP button COMPLETE is displayed when it has completed without any problem 62 ENGLISH Chapter3 Basic Operations Operating with the remote control This operation can be also performed using the AUTO SETUP button on the control panel Note The clock phase may shift even if it has completed without any incident In such cases adjust the POSITION menu CLOCK PHASE 9 page 81 e f an image with blurred edges or a dark image is input INCOMPLETE may appear or adjustment may not be performed
64. Press the input selection lt RGB1 gt lt RGB2 gt lt DVI D gt VIDEO lt HDMI gt lt SDI 1 2 buttons to select the input signal SDI input is only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DZ10KE 4 Adjust the front back and sideway tilt of the projector with the adjustable feet page 45 5 Press the lt SHIFT gt button to adjust the position of the image 6 Ifthe input signal is an RGB signal press the AUTO SETUP button 7 Press the ZOOM button to adjust the size of the image to match the screen 8 Press the lt FOCUS gt button again to adjust the focus 9 Press the ZOOM button again to adjust the zoom and the size of the image to match the screen Note When the projector is switched on for the first time after purchase as well as when ALL USER DATA is executed from the PROJECTOR SETUP menu gt INITIALIZE the focus adjustment screen is displayed after projection starts then the INITIAL SETTING screen is displayed Refer to Start up display page 22 for details 54 ENGLISH Chapter 3 Basic Operations Switching on off the projector POWER ON STANDBY 4 MA N POWER or ON om oo teu a oo Panasonic PROJECTOR 1 Press the power standby d button The POWER OFF STANDBY
65. Projectors for details The model numbers of accessories and optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice Bottom view Model No of Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors ET PKD310H for High Ceilings ET PKD310S for Low Ceilings ET PAD310 Projector ceiling mount bracket 00000 000 p O00 DU 000 00 it o D f o PT 00 a 00 Sooo a000 l ee re e M6 B 16 mm 5 8 CY I L 1 Torque 4 0 5 N m 188 ENGLISH Index Index 0 9 3D COLOR MATCHING 3D FRAME DELAY 3D INPUT FORMAT 3D PICTURE BALANCE 3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 3D SETTINGS 3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING 3D SYNC SETTING 3D SYSTEM SETTING 3D TEST MODE 3D TEST PATTERN A Accessories AC IN terminal Adjusting adjustable feet ADVANCED MENU Air filter unit 160 Air filter unit compartmen Art Net 18 170 Art Net SE 138 ASPECT T9 ASPECT button Remote control 24 63 Aspect function Attaching removing the projection lens Automatic setup function AUTO SETUP AUTO SETUP button Projector body Remote control AUTO SIGNAL
66. SYNC 1 IN OUT gt terminal and the 3D SYNC 2 OUT gt terminal using cables complete the 3D SYNC MODE setting and confirm that the external devices to be connected are turned off Changing 3D SYNC MODE while the cables are connected may result in malfunctions of the projector or the connected external devices 1 Press AY to select 3D SYNC SETTING 2 Press the ENTER button The precaution message related to 3D SYNC SETTING is displayed 3 Press the ENTER button The 3D SYNC SETTING screen is displayed 4 Press A V to select 3D SYNC MODE 5 Press 4b to switch the item 3D SYNC MODE Items set in 3D SYNC1 Items set in 3D SYNC2 OFF Not used Not used 1 3D trigger output Stereo synch output 2 3D trigger output 3D trigger output 3 Stereo synch input Through 3D SYNC1 4 Stereo synch input Stereo synch output 5 Stereo synch input 3D trigger output 6 Frame synch input Through 3D SYNC1 7 Frame synch input Stereo synch output 9 Frame synch input 3D trigger output 9 3D trigger output Frame synch output ENGLISH 91 Chapter4 Settings 3D SETTINGS menu 3D SYNC MODE Items set in 3D SYNC1 Items set in 3D SYNC2 10 Stereo synch output Frame synch output 11 3D IR TRANSMITTER output 3D IR TRANSMITTER output 6 When 1 4 7 or 10 is selected press A W to select STEREO SYNC OUTPUT DELA
67. Self diagnosis result display Displays the item check results OK Indicates that operation is normal FAILED Indicates that there is a problem WARNING Indicates that there is a warning p Bex projector control window x Projector Control Window Projector status Network status Access error log Access log Panasonic projector check system Status Projector control INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE Detailed AROUND LAMP TEMPERATURE SetuP LAMPI REMAIN TIME Change password ETTETUE CRESTRON RoomView OPTICS MODULE TEMP SENSOR AROUND LAMP TEMP SENSOR Bam BATTERY LENS MOUNTER B FAILED items displayed when a problem occurs Parameter Description MAIN CPU BUS There is a problem with the microcomputer circuitry Consult your dealer FAN There is a problem with the fan or the fan drive circuit Consult your dealer INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE The air intake temperature is too high The projector may be used in an operating environment where the temperature is high such as near a heating appliance OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE The temperature around the optics module inside the projector is high The projector may be used in an operating environment where the temperature is high such as near a heating appliance AROUND LAMP TEMPERATURE The temperature around the lamp is high The air exhaust port may be blocked LA
68. Single link During SDI1 SDI input select AUTO 480i YCsCp 576i YCaC4 720 50p YPgP4 720 60p YPsPp 1035 60i YPsPal 1080 24p YPgP4 1080 24sF YPgPpl 1080 25p YPaPpl 1080 30p YP amp P4 1080 50i YP amp P4 1080 60i YP Ppl 1080 50p YPgPal 1080 60p YPgPal 1080 24p RGB 1080 24sF RGB 1080 25p RGB 1080 30p RGB 1080 50i RGB or 1080 60i RGB During SDI2 input select AUTO 480i YCgCal 576i YCsCp 720 50p YPgP4 720 60p YP amp P 1035 60i YPaP 1080 24p YP Ppl 1080 24sF YPgPpl 1080 25p YPP 1080 30p YPgPal 1080 50i YPgP or 1080 60i YPsPp Dual link Select AUTO 1080 24p RGB 2K 24p RGB 2K 24p XYZ 1080 24sF RGB 2K 24sF RGB 2K 24sF XYZ 1080 25p RGB 1080 30p RGB 1080 50i RGB or 1080 60i RGB lt SDI IN terminal only for PT DZ10KE Select AUTO 480i YCgCl 576i YCaCa 720 50p YPgPg 720 60p YPsPp 1035 60i YPsPal 1080 24p YPgPpl 1080 24sF YP amp P 1080 25p YP amp P 1080 30p YPgPpl 1080 50i YPgP 1080 60i YP amp P 1080 50p YP amp P 1080 60p YP amp P4 1080 24p RGB 1080 24sF RGB 1080 25p RGB 1080 30p RGB 1080 50i RGB or 1080 60i RGB Press the ENTER button Note e Refer to List of compatible signals amp page 179 for the types of video signals that can be used with the projector This may not function properly for some connected external devices ENGLISH 7
69. TEMPERATURE OK AROUND LAMP TEMPERATURE OK LAMP1 REMAIN TIME OK LAMP2 REMAIN TIME OK LAMP1 STATUS OK LAMP2 STATUS OK APERTURE CONTRAST SHUTTER OK INTAKE AIR TEMP SENSOR OK OPTICS MODULE TEMP SENSOR OK AROUND LAMP TEMP SENSOR OK BATTERY OK LENS MOUNTER OK COVER OPEN OK BRIGHTNESS SENSOR OK ANGLE SENSOR OK FILTER UNIT OK AIR FILTER OK AC POWER OK Error code 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Intake air temperature 27 degC 80 degF Optics module temperature 33 degC 91 degF Around lamp temperature 32 degC 89 degF PROJECTOR RUNTIME 200H POWER ON 1 times LAMP1 ON 1 times LAMP1 LOW 200 H LAMP1 MID OH LAMP1 HIGH OH LAMP1 REMAIN 1800 H LAMP2 ON 1 times LAMP2 LOW 200 H LAMP2 MID OH LAMP2 HIGH OH LAMP2 REMAIN 1800 H T Current status MAIN VERSION 1 00 NETWORK VERSION 1 00 SUB VERSION 1 00 LAMP STATUS LAMP1 ON LAMP2 ON INPUT RGB1 REMOTE2 STATUS DISABLE one Wired Network configuration DHCP Client OFF IP address 192 168 0 8 MAC address 70 85 12 00 00 00 Fri Nov 01 16 38 50 2013 ENGLISH 151 Chapter 4 Settings NETWORK menu Example of the E mail sent for an error The following E mail is sent when an error has occurred Panasonic projector report ERROR Projector Type DS12K Serial No SW1234567 check system MAIN CPU BUS OK FAN
70. and projecting forward Menu item Method PROJECTION METHOD REAR FLOOR PROJECTION METHOD FRONT FLOOR COOLING CONDITION PORTRAIT SETTING COOLING CONDITION PORTRAIT SETTING 1 For the portrait setting use the optional Replacement lamp unit for portrait mode Model No ET LAD320P 1 pc ET LAD320PW 2 pcs 2 Using the optional Replacement lamp unit for portrait mode Model No ET LAD320P 1 pc ET LAD320PW 2 pcs will set the cooling condition to PORTRAIT SETTING Note n the portrait setting the on screen menu is displayed sideways ENGLISH 31 Chapter 2 Getting Started Setting up You can install the projector on the ceiling using the optional Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors Model No ET PKD310H for High Ceilings ET PKD3108 for Low Ceilings Be sure to use the Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors specified for this projector Refer to the Installation Instructions supplied with the Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors when installing the projector with the bracket Attention To ensure projector performance and security installation of the Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors must be carried out by your dealer or a qualified technician Refer to the screen size and projection distances to install the projector Image size and image position can be adjusted in accordance with the Screen size and screen position Projection
71. and then push it in slowly Pushing it in quickly or forcibly may break the connector 164 ENGLISH Chapter 5 Maintenance Maintenance replacement 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to firmly tighten the lamp unit fixing screws x2 each Make sure to attach the lamp unit securely 6 Attach the lamp unit cover i Close the lamp unit cover in Step 2 in the reverse order Attach the lamp unit cover so that the connector of the lamp unit cover is inserted to the fan power connector securely ii Use a Phillips screwdriver to firmly tighten the lamp unit fixing screw x1 Make sure to attach the lamp unit cover securely Note When you replace the lamp unit with new one the projector resets the runtime of the lamp unit automatically ENGLISH 165 Chapter 5 Maintenance Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Review the following points For details see the corresponding pages Problems Points to be checked Page s the power plug firmly inserted into the outlet Is the MAIN POWER switch set to OFF 55 s the wall outlet supplying electricity Power does not turn on Have the circuit breakers tripped Are the lamp indicator lt LAMP1 gt lt LAMP2 gt or the temperature indicator TEMP lit 458 or flashing s the lamp unit cover attached 164 Are connections to external devices correctly performed 48 s the input selection settin
72. buttons on the control panel and the remote control cannot be used The power on button the power standby lt gt button the lt SHUTTER gt button and the RS 232C commands and network functions corresponding to these functions cannot be used either When pins 1 and 9 are short circuited if any pins from 3 to 7 are short circuited with pin 1 the following buttons on the control panel and the remote control cannot be used The power on button the power standby d button lt RGB1 gt button lt RGB2 gt button lt DVI D gt button VIDEO button lt HDMI gt button SDI 1 2 button SHUTTER button and the RS 232C commands and network functions corresponding to these functions cannot be used either Note e For pin 2 to pin 8 settings you can make changes if you set REMOTE2 MODE to USER page 122 ENGLISH 177 Chapter 6 Appendix Technical information m m bination list Sub window RGB1 RGB2 VIDEO RGB Movie 3 YIC input RGB Movie 3 input A4 A4 A4 v A A LA A v A4 V j 4 A A A A A P4 A v A4 V v v V v A A V A A v y V y V v A A A P4 A A V A A v A A A4 A A V A A A A Sub window EYED HDMI Dual link RGB Movie RGB Movie SEU Sp HD SDI 7 y A4 V y A4 v v A V A A A V A V A A A A A4 A4 V A4 A4 V A A V A A A
73. clock shield 11 T M D S data 1 3 shield 23 T M D S clock 12 24 T M D S clock For lt HDMLIN gt lt DVI D _IN gt lt VIDEO IN terminals o0 j BO DVD player with HDMI terminal HDCP I Ey XZTIUR E pa Blu ray disc player VCR with built in TBC Attention e Always use one of the following when connecting a VCR AVCR with built in time base corrector TBC Atime base corrector TBC between the projector and the VCR e f nonstandard burst signals are connected the image may be distorted In such case connect the time base corrector TBC between the projector and the external devices Note When entering DVI D some external devices to be connected may require switching the setting using the DISPLAY OPTION menu gt DVI D IN EDID The DVI D IN terminal can be connected to HDMI or DVI D compliant devices However images may not appear or may not be displayed properly on some devices For an HDMI cable use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to HDMI standards If a cable that does not conform to HDMI standards is used images may be interrupted or may not be displayed The HDMI IN terminal of the projector can be connected to an external device with a DVI D terminal by using an HDMI DVI conversion cable but some devices may not project the image properly or function properly
74. external devices for viewing 3D images such as 3D eyewear video signal output devices which are suitable for your 3D system For connections of the projector and external devices they are different depends on the 3D system to be used see the operating instructions of external devices you use Refer to List of 3D compatible signals page 181 for the types of 3D video signals that can be used with the projector Sof inf l ling thi j Panasonic Corporation 2013 This product is equipped with the following software 1 Software which is developed independently by or for Panasonic Corporation 2 Software which is licensed under GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 3 Software which is licensed under GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE For license conditions related to software in 2 and 3 refer to the provisions of the software licenses GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE and GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE in the supplied CD ROM Those provisions are written in English because they have been stipulated by third parties If you have any questions regarding the software please contact us via email sav pj gpl pavc ml jp panasonic com ENGLISH 19 Chapter 1 Preparation Precautions for use Make sure that the following accessories are provided with your projector Numbers enclosed in show the number of accessories Wireless wired remote control unit 1 CD ROM 1 N2QAYBO000769 TXFQBO2VLF9
75. images of the simultaneous system are displayed Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE 128 ENGLISH Chapter 4 Settings TEST PATTERN menu TEST PATTERN menu On the menu screen select TEST PATTERN from the main menu Press 4P to switch TET TESTPATTERN FUNC CoD CD CD C0 CD CO Refer to Navigating through the menu page 65 for the operation of the menu screen Display the test pattern built in to the projector Settings of position size and other factors will not be reflected in test patterns Make sure to display the input signal before performing various adjustments 1 Press 4P to switch the TEST PATTERN item The items will switch each time you press the button Menu screen All white Menu screen All black Menu screen Window Menu screen Window inversion vertical adjustments Menu screen Color bar horizontal Menu screen 16 9 4 3 aspect frame Menu screen Focus Menu screen Color bar Displays test patterns with the menu screen Select a test pattern so that it is easy to make various Displays the menu screen and input signal Pont Servet nEnHy Sereop Built in test patterns are not displayed Note Press the ON SCREEN button on the remote control while the test pattern is displayed to hide the menu screen Changing color or a focus test pattern When the Menu Screen Foc
76. input or output control signals when using the projector in 3D systems Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE lt LAN gt terminal This is a terminal to connect to the network Used for control and monitoring Image input through network connections is not possible When a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector the network connection must be made indoors ENGLISH 27 Chapter 1 Preparation Using the remote control Using the remote control Fig 1 Fig 2 1 Open the cover Fig 1 2 Insert the batteries and close the cover insert the side first Fig 2 When removing the batteries perform the steps in reverse order When you use the system with multiple projectors you can operate all the projectors simultaneously or each projector individually using single remote control if a unique ID number is assigned to each projector After setting the ID number of the projector set same ID number on the remote control The factory default ID number of the projector is set to ALL When using a single projector press the ID ALL button on the remote control Also you can control a projector by pressing the ID ALL button on the remote control even if you do not know the projector ID How to set 1 Press the ID SET button on the remote control 2 Within five seconds press the two digit ID number set on the projector using the number lt 0 gt lt 9 gt buttons f you press
77. menu ssssssssssssssssssseeeeneeees 67 PICTURE menu 71 PICTURE MODE eesti oda eee 71 CONTRAST eta cotta teet e etras 71 BRIGHTNESS reet ttes 72 COLEOR 5 5 orb teret esiti 72 TNT iiiter rrt t Be hatte et 72 COLOR TEMPERATURE sss 72 GAMMA triti tette e e He 74 SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW 75 SHARPNESS eee tret tret ieee 75 NOISE REDUCTION 76 DYNAMIC IRIS 76 SYSTEM SELECTOR TT SRGB compliant video sss 78 Contents POSITION men emet eso 79 PSTD T E shoeet oes ti casera ea beanonecseel ech ontsths hateaelneniee 79 ASPECT onn te ente ted ise 79 ZOOM niri ett iet Petite 80 CLOCK PHASE e d enr ee etes 81 IGEOMETRY s oie o etos ep ete 81 KEXSTONE etna s 84 ADVANCED MENU menu 85 DIGITAL CINEMA REALI Y 85 BLANKING sssssssssseees 85 INPUT RESOLUTION 86 CLAMP POSITION 86 EDGE BLENDING ss 87 FRAME RESPONSE 88 FRAME LOCK rete epi 89 RASTER POSITION 89 DISPLAY LANGUAGE menu sss 90 Changing the display language 90 3D SETTINGS menu sss 91 3D SYSTEM SETTING 91 3D SYNC SETTING 91 BD SIMUL INPUT SETTING 92 I3D INPUT FORMAT etes 92 LEFT RIGHT SWAP t t eene 93 3D COLOR MATCHING e 93 3D PICTURE BALANCE 93 DARK TIME SETTING 94 3D FRAME DELAY sss 94 SD TEST MODE sis 5 ioi or tenerse 94 3D TEST PATTERN 95 SAFETY PRECAUTION
78. properly even when COMPLETE appears In this case adjust the settings in the ADVANCED MENU menu INPUT RESOLUTION 9 page 86 POSITION CLOCK PHASE 9 page 81 and SHIFT page 79 Adjust special signals according to the DISPLAY OPTION menu AUTO SETUP 9 page 98 Automatic adjustment may not work depending on the model of the computer Automatic adjustment may not work for a synchronization signal of C SY or SYNC ON GREEN Images may be disrupted for a few seconds during automatic adjustment but it is not a malfunction Adjustment is required for each input signal Automatic adjustment can be canceled by pressing the MENU button during the automatic adjustment operation If the automatic setup function is used while moving images are being input the adjustment may not be performed properly even for an RGB signal that can use automatic setup INCOMPLETE may appear or adjustment may not be finished properly even if COMPLETE appears P IN P SSUB MEMORY SYSTEM SELECTOR SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW FREEZE WAVEFORM MONITOR LENS MEMORY LOAD or LEFT RIGHT SWAP operations can be assigned to the lt FUNC gt button on the remote control so that it can be used as an easy shortcut button FUNC button 1 Press the lt FUNC gt button Note e LEFT RIGHT SWAP can only be assigned in PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE e Assignment of the function is performed from the PROJECTOR SETUP menu
79. registration requires separate software Consult your dealer USER To adjust edge blending proceed to Step 3 3 When ON or USER is selected press the ENTER button The EDGE BLENDING screen is displayed 4 Press A V to specify the location to be corrected When joining at top Set UPPER to ON When joining at bottom Set LOWER to ON When joining at left Set LEFT to ON When joining at right Set RIGHT to ON 5 Press 4b to switch between ON and OFF 6 Press AY to select START and WIDTH 7 Press 4b to adjust the starting position and correction width 8 Press A V to select MARKER 9 Press 4b to switch to ON A marker for image position adjustment is displayed The position where the red and green lines overlap for the projectors to be joined will be the optimal point Make sure to set the correction width for the projectors to be joined with the same value Optimal joining is not possible with projectors that have different correction widths The optimal point is the point at which these lines overlap Red line 10 Press AY to select BRIGHTNESS ADJUST 11 Press the ENTER button The BRIGHTNESS ADJUST screen is displayed By setting AUTO TESTPATTERN on the EDGE BLENDING screen to ON the black test pattern is displayed when you enter the BRIGHTNESS ADJUST screen 12 Press AW to select NON OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL 13 Press t
80. rights to all projectors to be linked There is a problem with the brightness sensor If problems persist even after switching on the Brightness Sensor Error power consult your dealer 1 Multi Projector Monitoring amp Control Software is included in the supplied CD ROM Note e f the synchronized projectors are not displayed in the list check the following Are there devices with the same IP address on the network Are the LAN cables connected correctly page 138 Are the subnets of the projectors the same Are the same LINK settings applied to a group Refer to NETWORK SETUP 9 page 137 or Network config page gt page 146 on how to change the projector name ENGLISH 115 Chapter4 Settings PROJECTOR SETUP menu Brightness control adjustment procedure example The steps exemplify an adjustment to link the brightness of eight projectors connected in a network 1 Connect all projectors to the hub using LAN cables page 138 2 Switch on all projectors and start projection 3 Set LAMP SELECT to either DUAL or SINGLE for all projectors 4 Set MODE of BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP to OFF and select APPLY and then press the ENTER button 5 Set SUBNET MASK and IP ADDRESS in each projector To be able to communicate over the network set the same value in SUBNET MASK for all projectors and set a different value in IP ADDRESS for each projector
81. select RS 232C 2 Press the ENTER button The RS 232C screen is displayed 3 Press AY to select OUT BAUDRATE 4 Press 4b to switch the item 9600 19200 Select the proper speed 38400 5 Press A V to select OUT PARITY 6 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button ENGLISH 119 Chapter4 Settings PROJECTOR SETUP menu NONE EVEN ODD Select the parity condition Setting the response 1 Press A V to select RS 232C 2 Press the ENTER button The RS 232C screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select RESPONSE ID ALL 4 Press 4 gt to switch the item ON Returns the response when the ID setting is ALL OFF Does not return the response when the ID setting is ALL 5 Press A V to select GROUP 6 Press 4b to switch the item IA 2 Controls multiple projectors simultaneously by sending the ID of RS 232C You can set groups from A to Z The projector responds when the ID of RS 232C matches the setting 7 Press A V to select RESPONSE ID GROUP 8 Press 4b to switch the item ON OFF Returns the response when the ID setting is GROUP Does not return the response when the ID setting is GROUP Note Refer to lt SERIAL IN gt lt SERIAL OUT gt terminal page 173 STATUS yyy Displ
82. signals automatically Select mainly when an external device that outputs movie based video signals such as a blu ray disc i player is connected to the lt DVI D IN gt terminal Select mainly when an external device that outputs still image signals such as a computer is EDID2 PC connected to the DVI D IN terminal 5 Press A V to select SIGNAL LEVEL 6 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button AUTO Automatically sets the signal level 0 255 PC Select when an external device such as a computer is connected via the DVI D terminal output 16 235 Select when an external device such as a blu ray disc player is connected via the HDMI terminal output using a conversion cable etc Note The optimal setting varies depending on the output setting of the connected external device Refer to the operating instructions of the external device regarding the output of the external device e The data for Plug and play will change when the setting is changed Refer to List of compatible signals page 179 for a resolution that supports plug and play HDMI IN K Switch the setting when the external device is connected to the lt HDMI IN gt terminal of the projector and the image is not projected correctly 1 Press A V to select HDMI IN 2 Press the lt ENTER gt button e The HDMI IN screen is displayed 3 Press 4 to swit
83. sure that the projector is stable and perform the replacement in a safe place where the unit will not be damaged even if you drop the air filter unit 1 Remove the air filter unit e Refer to Removing the air filter unit page 160 2 Attach the optional Replacement Filter Unit Model No ET EMF320 to the projector The air filter unit has no difference between top and bottom but is two sided Match the protrusion position of the air filter unit with the grooves on the projector body e Refer to Attaching the air filter unit page 161 Attention When switching on the projector make sure that the air filter unit is attached If it is not properly attached the projector will suck in dirt and dust causing a malfunction f you use the projector without attaching the air filter unit the filter indicator FILTER flashes in red and the message appears on the projection screen for approximately 30 seconds Note The replacement cycle of the air filter unit varies greatly depending on the usage environment Lamp unit The lamp unit is a consumable component Refer to When to replace the lamp unit page 163 for details about the replacement cycle When purchasing the optional Replacement lamp unit Model No ET LAD310A 1 pc ET LAD310AW 2 pcs or the Replacement lamp unit for portrait mode Model No ET LAD320P 1 pc ET LAD320PW 2 pcs consult your dealer It is recommended that you request a q
84. the ID ALL button you can control the projectors regardless of the ID number setting of the projector Attention e Since the ID number of the remote control can be set without the projector do not press the ID SET button carelessly If the ID SET button is pressed and no number lt 0 gt lt 9 gt buttons are pressed within five seconds the ID number returns to its original value before the ID SET button was pressed The ID number set on the remote control will be stored unless it is set again However it will be erased if the remote control is left with dead batteries Set the same ID number again when the batteries are replaced Note e Set the ID number of the projector from the PROJECTOR SETUP menu PROJECTOR ID 28 ENGLISH Chapter 1 Preparation Using the remote control C l l T When you use the system with multiple projectors use commercial M3 stereo mini jack cables and connect the other devices to the lt REMOTE 1 IN gt lt REMOTE 1 OUT gt terminals of the projector body The remote control is effective even in places where an obstacle stands in the light path or where devices are susceptible to outside light M3 stereo mini jack cable commercially available Connecting to a second projector Connecting to the remote control wired B terminal Connecting terminals Attention Use a cable that is 15 m 49 2 or shorter with 2 core shield The r
85. the control DISABLE 134 panel do not operate Is the lt REMOTE 2 IN terminal used for contact control 177 s the SYSTEM SELECTOR selection set correctly 77 Mic ori not display s there a problem with the video tape or other image sources s a signal which is not compatible with the projector being input 179 s the cable too long Use D Sub cables that are 10 m 32 10 or shorter Image from a computer e Is the external video output on the laptop computer set correctly Ex The external does not appear output settings may be switched by pressing the Fn F3 or Fn F10 simultaneously Since the method varies depending on the computer type refer to the user manual provided with your computer Is the DVI D IN setting EDID3 EDID2 PC 101 eal Ma UR aaah e The graphics accelerator driver of the computer may need to be updated to the appear latest version e The computer may need to be restarted after performing the DVI D IN setting 101 Video from HDMI s the HDMI cable connected securely 48 compatible device does Turn the power of the projector and the external device off and on not appear or it appears jumbled e Is a signal which is not compatible with the projector being input 179 Cannot control the Is Art Net SETUP set to an item other than OFF 138 projector with Art Net Are the NET SUB NET UNIVERSE and START ADDRESS settings correct 138 16
86. the projector or when the lamp unit used in the projector to a projector of a different model the lighting time and runtime displayed in STATUS may differ from the actual time A function that automatically switches the power source of the projector to standby if there is no input signal for a certain period of time The time before switching to standby can be set 1 Press AY to select NO SIGNAL SHUT OFF 2 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button DISABLE 10MIN 90MIN Disables the No signal shut off function Allows you to set in ten minutes intervals ENGLISH 121 Chapter4 Settings PROJECTOR SETUP menu REMOTE2MODE J You can set the lt REMOTE 2 IN terminal 1 Press A V to select REMOTE2 MODE 2 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button DEFAULT The pin assignment of the lt REMOTE 2 IN terminal is used by the factory default setting of the projector USER Used to change the setting of the lt REMOTE 2 IN terminal L6500 SERIES The setting of lt REMOTE 2 IN terminal is used for the L6500 series compatibility When USER is selected proceed to Step 3 3 Press the ENTER button 4 Press A V to select one from PIN2 to PIN8 and press q gt to switch the setting FUNCTION BUTTON b Set the functions o
87. to the signal selected in Step 2 Deleting the sub memory 1 2 3 Press q gt on the normal screen when the menu is not displayed The SUB MEMORY LIST screen is displayed Press A V 4 to select the sub memory to delete and press the DEFAULT button The REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE screen is displayed e To cancel the deletion press the MENU button to return to the SUB MEMORY LIST screen Press the ENTER button The selected sub memory will be deleted 132 ENGLISH Chapter 4 Settings SECURITY menu SECURITY menu On the menu screen select SECURITY from the main menu and select an item from the sub menu Refer to Navigating through the menu page 65 for the operation of the menu screen When the projector is used for the first time Initial password Press AP W A w 4 in order and press the ENTER button e After selecting the item press A W b to set Attention When you select the SECURITY menu and press the ENTER button entering a password is required Enter the preset password and then continue operations of the SECURITY menu e When the password has been changed previously enter the changed password and press the ENTER button Note The entered password is displayed with marks on the screen An error message is displayed on the screen when the entered password is incorrect Re enter the correct password Display the S
88. 0 0 121 8 V 1 440 x 900 55 9 59 9 106 5 4 WXGA 1 440 x 900 46 3 49 9 86 8 4 UXGA60 1 600 x 1 200 75 0 60 0 162 0 V 1 680 x 1 050 65 3 60 0 146 3 4 WSXGA 1 680 x 1 050 54 1 50 0 119 5 4 1 920 x 1 080 55 6 49 9 141 5 4 1920 x 1080 1 920 x 1 080 66 6 59 9 138 5 A 1 920 x 1 200 61 8 49 9 158 3 4 WUXGA 1 920 x 1 2002 74 0 60 0 154 0 4 1 Supports half 2 VESA CVT RB Reduced Blanking compliant 182 ENGLISH Chapter 6 Appendix Technical information r J Scanning freq Dot clock RGB1 RGB2 SDI1 SDI2 7 8 9 3D compatible Resolution Horizontal Vertical freq signal Dots z 3 1 3 g per kHz Hz MHz 21 3 4 5 27 3 4 63 10 10 10 750 720 60p 1 280 x 720 45 0 60 0 74 3 Vi vViv i vi vi iviivi viv v 750 720 50p 1 280 x 720 37 5 50 0 74 3 ae A A ee A ee ee ee ee ee 4 1080 60i 1 920 x 1 080i 33 8 60 0 74 3 Vivi vivi i vi ivi1 wvi v 1080 50i 1 920 x 1 080i 28 1 50 0 74 3 Vi v7i ivci ivi vi iviwv v 1080 24p 1 920 x 1 080 27 0 24 0 74 3 Vivi vivi vivi vi wv 1080 24sF 1 920 x 1 080i 27 0 48 0 74 3 Vivi vivi i vi iv1 wv7i wv 1080 25p 1 920 x 1 080 28 1 25 0 74 3 Vi iv7i ivi iv i vi iviviwv 1080 30p 1 920 x 1 080 33 8 30 0 74 3 Vi v7i ivi ivi vi iviviwv 1080 60p 1 920 x 1 080 67 5 6
89. 0 0 148 5 Vi i vV3V3 v v 1080 50p 1 920 x 1 080 56 3 50 0 148 5 4i ivcs 3 v7 7 VGA480 640 x 480 31 5 59 9 25 2 2 l fe SS HS SS SVGA 800 x 600 37 9 60 3 40 0 Pe a mS Dp e e J JeIe e 1 024 x 768 39 6 50 0 51 9 oso o t o t c om ee 1 024 x 768 48 4 60 0 65 0 l p meee E mee eee ee l XGA 1 024 x 768 81 4 100 0 113 3 ee ee ae e B i e 1 024 x 768 98 8 120 0 139 1 9 ami ue MXGA 1 152 x 864 53 7 60 0 81 6 So f fs Sf Sf SS HS LS 1 280 x 720 37 1 49 8 60 5 Je mm mes RS m RIS m mns 1 280 x 720 44 8 59 9 74 5 JM EI ee Se ee a I 1280 x 720 1 280 x 720 76 3 100 0 131 8 pepper rx Ml 1 280 x 720 92 6 120 0 161 6 emn Lot em mE m eR m mns 1 280 x 768 39 6 49 9 65 3 LS SS SS S 1280 x 768 1 280 x 768 47 8 59 9 79 5 JE pomo mee em omis m me l 1 280 x 7687 47 4 60 0 68 3 j me o l l me e cee ie mm ee 1 280 x 800 41 3 50 0 68 0 4 f f SS SS HS 1280 x 800 1 280 x 800 49 7 59 8 83 5 V 1 280 x 8007 49 3 59 9 71 0 4 l l e jej jelj jel el el l ese MSXGA 1 280 x 960 60 0 60 0 108 0 4 l s ee ef eee ee ee eee m 1 280 x 1 024 52 4 50 0 88 0 las md m e ee RS SXGA 1 280 x 1 024 64 0 60 0 108 0 Vom S f Sf ES HS 1 366 x 768 47 7 59 8 85 5 Sf p S f ES S Sf HS HY SE 1366 x 768 1 366 x 768 39 6 49 9 69 0 Ext 1 400 x
90. 0 36 10 28 14 95 14 84 28 83 28 48 45 49 4 33 4 33 7 62 300 3 736 6 641 9 64 12 46 12 36 17 96 17 83 34 63 34 20 54 62 5 21 5 21 8 89 350 4 358 7 748 11 26 14 55 14 43 20 97 20 82 40 43 39 93 63 75 6 09 10 16 400 4 981 8 855 12 88 16 65 16 50 23 98 23 81 46 23 45 66 72 88 6 96 12 70 500 6 226 11 069 16 12 20 83 20 65 30 01 29 80 57 83 57 11 91 14 8 72 15 24 600 7 472 13 283 19 36 25 02 24 80 36 03 35 78 69 43 68 56 1109 40 10 48 25 40 1000 12 453 22 138 32 32 41 78 41 38 60 13 59 70 115 83 114 38 182 44 17 52 1 40 ENGLISH The throw ratio is based on the value during projection onto a 3 81 m 150 screen size Chapter 2 Getting Started Setting up B When the screen aspect is 4 3 Unit m Lens type Zoom lens Projection lens Model No ET D75LE1 ET D75LE2 ET D75LE3 ET D75LE4 ET D75LE8 ET D75LE6 Throw ratio 2 0 2 7 1 2 7 4 1 1 4 1 6 9 1 6 9 11 0 1 10 9 20 5 1 1 4 1 6 1 Projection screen size Projection distance L 5 Height gt Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Diagona SD E E w aT E LW ED LW LT 1 78 70 1 067 1 422 2 86 3 82 3 86 5 80 5 81 9 7
91. 0 74 3 v y V V 1080 24p 1920 x 1 080 27 0 24 0 74 3 4 V V V A4 1080 24sF 1 920 x 1 080i 27 0 48 0 74 3 V A4 1080 25p 1 920 x 1 080 28 1 25 0 74 3 V V 1080 30p 1 920 x 1 080 33 8 30 0 74 3 m V A4 1080 60p 1 920 x 1 080 67 5 60 0 148 5 A4 y A4 V 1080 50p 1 920 x 1 080 56 3 50 0 148 5 4 v V v VGA480 640 x 480 31 5 59 9 25 2 V SVGA 800 x 600 37 9 60 3 40 0 A4 ENGLISH 181 Chapter 6 Appendix Technical information Scanning freq 3D compatible Resolution g d Deos signal Dots Horizontal Vertical freq kHz Hz MHz 1 024 x 768 39 6 50 0 51 9 1 024 x 768 48 4 XGA 1 024 x 768 81 4 1 024 x 768 98 8 MXGA 1 152 x 864 53 7 4 1 280 x 720 37 1 y 1 280 x 720 44 8 V 1280 x 720 1 280 x 720 76 3 1 280 x 720 92 6 1 280 x 768 39 6 4 1280 x 768 1 280 x 768 47 8 4 1 280 x 768 47 4 4 1 280 x 800 41 3 4 1280 x 800 1 280 x 800 49 7 4 1 280 x 800 49 3 v MSXGA 1 280 x 960 60 0 v 1 280 x 1 024 524 50 0 88 0 A SXGA 1 280 x 1 024 64 0 60 0 108 0 4 1 366 x 768 47 7 59 8 85 5 V 1366 x 768 1 366 x 768 39 6 49 9 69 0 4 1 400 x 1 050 54 1 50 0 99 9 V 1 400 x 1 050 64 0 60 0 108 0 V SXGA 1 400 x 1 050 65 2 60 0 122 6 4 1 400 x 1 050 65 3 6
92. 067 1 422 1 95 2 52 2 52 3 66 3 64 7 10 7 02 11 28 1 02 1 03 2 03 80 1 219 1 626 2 24 2 89 2 89 4 20 4 17 8 13 8 05 12 92 1 18 1 19 2 29 90 1 372 1 829 2 53 3 27 3 26 4 74 4 71 9 17 9 07 14 56 1 34 1 35 2 54 100 1 524 2 032 2 82 3 64 3 63 5 28 5 24 10 21 10 10 16 19 1 50 1 50 3 05 120 1 829 2 438 3 40 4 39 4 37 6 36 6 31 12 29 12 15 19 46 1 81 1 82 3 81 150 2 286 3 048 4 27 5 52 5 49 7 98 7 92 15 41 15 23 24 37 2 29 2 29 5 08 200 3 048 4 064 5 72 7 39 7 34 10 67 10 60 20 60 20 35 32 54 3 08 3 08 6 35 250 3 810 5 080 7 17 9 27 9 20 13 37 13 28 25 79 25 48 40 72 3 87 3 87 7 62 300 4 572 6 096 8 62 11 14 11 06 16 07 15 96 30 99 30 61 48 89 4 66 4 65 8 89 350 5 334 7 112 10 07 13 02 12 91 18 77 18 63 36 18 35 74 57 07 5 44 10 16 400 6 096 8 128 11 52 14 90 14 77 21 46 21 31 41 38 40 87 65 25 6 23 12 70 500 7 620 10 160 14 42 18 65 18 48 26 86 26 67 51 77 51 12 81 60 7 80 15 24 600 9 144 12 192 17 33 22 40 22 19 32 25 32 03 62 15 61 38 97 95 9 38 25 40 1000 15 240 20 320 28 93 37 40 37 05 53 83 53 45 103 711102 41 163 36 15 68 1 38 ENGLISH The throw ratio is based on the value during projection onto a 3 81 m 150 screen size Chapter 2 Getting Started Setting up B When the screen aspect i
93. 1 280 x 768 8 47 4 60 0 68 3 R D H 1 280 x 768 60 3 74 9 102 3 R D H 1 280 x 768 68 6 84 8 117 5 R D H a 1 280 x 800 41 3 50 0 68 0 R D H 1 280 x 800 49 7 59 8 83 5 R D H 1280 x 800 1 280 x 800 8 49 3 59 9 71 0 R D H 1 280 x 800 62 8 74 9 106 5 R D H 1 280 x 800 71 6 84 9 122 5 R D H MSXGA 1 280 x 960 60 0 60 0 108 0 R D H 1 280 x 1 024 52 4 50 0 88 0 R D H 1 280 x 1 024 64 0 60 0 108 0 R D H 4 4 4 4 1 280 x 1 024 72 3 66 3 125 0 R D H SXGA 1 280 x 1 024 78 2 72 0 135 1 R D H 1 280 x 1 024 80 0 75 0 135 0 R D H 4 4 v v 1 280 x 1 024 91 1 85 0 157 5 R D H 1366 x 768 47 7 59 8 85 5 R D H 9 9 9 9 1366 x 768 Y S pes oe 1 366 x 768 39 6 49 9 69 0 R D H 1 400 x 1 050 54 1 50 0 99 9 R D H 1 400 x 1 050 64 0 60 0 108 0 R D H 1 400 x 1 050 65 2 60 0 122 6 R D H SXGA x 4 4 4 v 1 400 x 1 050 65 3 60 0 121 8 R D H 1400 x 1 050 78 8 72 0 149 3 R D H 1400 x 1 050 82 2 75 0 155 9 R D H 1 440 x 900 55 9 59 9 106 5 R D H EN WXGA 1 440 x 900 46 3 49 9 86 8 R D H UXGA60 1 600 x 1 200 75 0 60 0 162 0 R D H 4 4 4 4 1 680 x 1 050 65 3 60 0 146 3 R D H
94. 10 40 25 40 1000 15 240 20 320 32 08 41 46 41 07 59 68 59 26 114 96 113 52 1181 07 17 39 1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection onto a 3 81 m 150 screen size ENGLISH 37 Chapter 2 Getting Started Setting up For PT DS12KE E When the screen aspect is 4 3 Unit m Lens type Zoom lens Projection lens Model No ET D75LE1 ET D75LE2 ET D75LE3 ET D75LE4 ET D75LE8 ET D75LE6 Throw ratio 1 5 2 0 1 2 0 30 1 3 0 5 0 1 5 0 8 0 1 7 9 15 0 1 1 0 1 2 1 Projection screen size Projection distance L Height Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Diagonal SD sey Width SW ew rp iw rr rw LT ew LT LW LT LW LT 1 78 70 1 067 1 422 2 07 2 77 2 80 421 423 7 09 7 10 11 37 11 09 21 14 1 39 1 66 2 03 80 1 219 1 626 2 38 3 18 3 21 4 83 4 84 8 13 8 13 13 01 12 73 24 21 1 60 1 91 2 29 90 1 372 1 829 2 68 3 59 3 62 5 45 5 46 9 16 9 16 14 65 14 37 27 29 1 81 2 16 2 54 100 1 524 2 032 2 99 4 00 4 04 6 07 6 08 10 19 10 19 16 29 16 01 30 36 2 01 241 3 05 120 1 829 2 438 3 60 4 82 4 86 7 30 7 31 12 25 12 26 19 57 19 29 36 50 2
95. 2 8 1 16 9 Max LT L 2 4291 x SD 0 1064 Min LW L 1 7835 x SD 0 0795 2 2 to 3 3 1 4 3 Max LT L 2 6772 x SD 0 1064 Min LW L 2 3661 x SD 0 0958 2 8 to 4 6 1 16 10 Max LT L 3 9488 x SD 0 1216 Min LW L 2 4291 x SD 0 0958 ET D75LE3 2 8 to 4 6 1 16 9 Max LT L 7 4 0591 x SD 0 1216 Min LW L 2 6772 x SD 0 0958 3 3 to 5 5 1 4 3 Max LT L 4 4724 x SD 0 1216 Min LW L 3 9488 x SD 0 1158 4 6 to 7 4 1 16 10 Max LT L 7 6 2795 x SD 0 1013 Min LW L 4 0591 x SD 0 1158 ET D75LE4 4 6 to 7 4 1 16 9 Max LT L 7 6 4528 x SD 0 1013 Min LW L 4 4724 x SD 0 1158 5 6 to 8 9 1 4 3 Max LT L 7 1102 x SD 0 1013 Min LW L 6 2795 x SD 0 3862 7 3 to 13 8 1 16 10 Max LT L 11 7677 x SD 0 3598 Min LW L 6 4567 x SD 0 3862 ET D75LE8 7 3 to 13 8 1 16 9 Max LT L 12 0945 x SD 0 3598 Min LW L 7 1102 x SD 0 3862 8 8 to 16 5 1 4 3 Max LT L 13 3189 x SD 0 3598 Min LW L 0 7913 x SD 0 0566 0 9 to 1 1 1 16 10 Max LT L 0 9488 x SD 0 0736 Min LW L 0 8150 x SD 0 0566 ET D75LE6 0 9 to 1 1 1 16 9 Max LT L 0 9764 x SD 0 0736 Min LW L 7 0 8976 x SD 0 0566 1 1 to 1 3 1 4 3 Max LT L 1 0748 x SD 0 0736 Min LW L 1 1186 x SD 0 0857 1 3 to 1 7 1 16 10 Max LT L 1 4458 x SD 0 1085 Min LW L 1 1497 x SD 0 0857 ET D75LE10 1 3 to 1 7 1 16 9 Max LT L 1 4860 x SD 0 1085 Min LW L 1 2663 x SD 0 08
96. 23 85 2 22 2 24 5 08 200 2 692 4 308 5 60 7 24 7 19 10 45 10 38 20 16 19 92 31 86 2 99 3 01 6 35 250 3 365 5 385 7 02 9 07 9 00 13 09 13 0 25 25 24 95 39 86 3 76 3 78 7 62 300 4 039 6 462 8 44 10 91 10 82 15 73 15 62 30 34 29 97 47 87 4 53 4 56 8 89 350 4 712 7 539 9 86 12 74 12 64 18 37 18 24 35 42 34 99 55 87 5 33 10 16 400 5 385 8 616 11 28 14 58 14 46 21 01 20 86 40 51 40 01 63 87 6 10 12 70 500 6 731 10 770 14 12 18 25 18 09 26 29 26 11 50 68 50 05 79 88 7 64 15 24 600 8 077 12 923 16 96 21 92 21 73 31 58 31 35 60 85 60 09 95 89 9 18 25 40 1000 13 462 21 539 28 33 36 61 36 27 52 70 52 33 1101 53 100 25 159 93 15 35 1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection onto a 3 81 m 150 screen size ENGLISH 35 Chapter 2 Getting Started Setting up B When the screen aspect is 16 9 Unit m Lens type Zoom lens Projection lens Model No ET D75LE1 ET D75LE2 ET D75LE3 ET D75LE4 ET D75LE8 ET D75LE6 Throw ratio 1 4 1 8 1 1 8 2 8 1 2 8 4 6 1 4 6 7 4 1 7 3 13 8 1 0 9 1 1 1 Projection screen size Projection distance L B Height gt Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max
97. 3 20 91 20 92 34 98 34 99 55 72 55 44 104 24 6 99 8 37 10 16 400 5 385 8 616 11 86 15 85 15 94 23 92 23 93 40 00 40 01 63 70 63 42 119 19 8 00 9 58 12 70 500 6 731 10 770 14 85 19 84 19 94 29 92 29 93 50 03 50 04 79 65 79 37 149 08 10 01 11 99 15 24 600 8 077 12 923 17 83 23 82 23 94 35 93 35 94 60 06 60 07 95 60 95 32 178 96 12 03 14 40 25 40 1000 13 462 21 539 29 77 39 77 39 96 59 95 59 96 100 18 100 19 159 40 159 13 20 08 24 06 Lens type Zoom lens Fixed focus lens Projection lens Model No ET D75LE10 ET D75LE20 ET D75LE30 ET D75LE40 ET D75LE5 ET D75LE50 Throw ratio 1 3 1 7 1 1 7 2 4 1 2 4 4 7 1 4 6 7 4 1 0 7 1 0 7 1 Projection screen size Projection distance L Height Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max B Diagonal SD SH Width SW LW LT Lw LT w LT w LT Fixed Fixed 1 78 70 0 942 1 508 1 90 2 46 2 46 3 58 3 56 6 94 6 87 11 04 0 99 1 01 2 03 80 1 077 1 723 2 19 2 83 2 82 4 11 4 08 7 96 7 88 12 65 1 15 1 16 2 29 90 1 212 1 939 2 47 3 20 3 19 4 64 4 61 8 98 8 88 14 25 1 30 1 32 2 54 100 1 346 2 154 2 76 3 56 3 55 5 17 5 13 9 99 9 88 15 85 1 45 1 47 3 05 120 1 615 2 585 3 32 4 30 4 28 6 22 6 18 12 03 11 89 19 05 1 76 1 78 3 81 150 2 019 3 231 4 18 5 40 5 37 7 81 7 75 15 08 14 90
98. 3 45 93 73 13 72 85 136 85 9 18 11 01 12 70 500 6 226 11 069 17 05 22 78 22 90 34 36 34 37 57 44 57 45 91 43 91 16 171 16 11 49 13 78 15 24 600 7 472 13 283 20 48 27 36 27 49 41 25 41 26 68 95 68 96 1109 74 1109 47 205 46 13 80 16 55 25 40 1000 12 453 22 138 34 18 45 67 45 88 68 83 68 84 115 00 115 011182 97 182 70 23 04 27 63 Lens type Zoom lens Fixed focus lens Projection lens Model No ET D75LE10 ET D75LE20 ET D75LE30 ET D75LE40 ET D75LE5 ET D75LE50 Throw ratio 1 4 1 9 1 1 8 2 7 1 2 7 5 2 1 5 1 8 2 1 0 8 1 0 8 1 Projection screen size Projection distance L 5 Height r Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max A n Diagonal SD SH Width SW LW LT W LT w LT w LT Fixed Fixed 1 78 70 0 872 1 550 2 18 2 82 2 82 4 10 4 07 7 94 7 86 12 62 1 15 1 16 2 03 80 0 996 1 771 2 51 3 24 3 23 4 70 4 67 9 10 9 01 14 45 1 33 1 34 2 29 90 1 121 1 992 2 83 3 66 3 65 5 31 5 27 10 26 10 15 16 27 1 50 1 51 2 54 100 1 245 2 214 3 15 4 08 4 06 5 91 5 87 11 42 11 30 18 10 1 68 1 69 3 05 120 1 494 2 657 3 80 4 92 4 89 7 11 7 07 13 74 13 59 21 75 2 03 2 04 3 81 150 1 968 3 321 4 78 6 17 6 14 8 92 8 86 17 22 17 02 27 23 2 56 2 57 5 08 200 2 491 4 428 6 40 8 27 8 21 11 93 11 85 23 03 22 75 36 36 3 44 3 45 6 35 250 3 113 5 535 8 02 1
99. 3 Projection distance R3 Arc radius Standard status Only for KEYSTONE KEYSTONE and CURVED used together Only for CURVED Projection Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal lens Model keystone keystone keystone keystone Min value of Min value of Min value of Min value of No correction correction correction correction R2 L2 R3 L3 R2 L2 R3 L3 angle a angle B angle a angle f ET D75LE1 2 3 0 6 1 3 ET D75LE2 1 6 0 5 0 9 ET D75LE3 1 1 0 3 0 6 ET D75LE4 0 7 0 2 0 4 ET D75LE5 4 9 1 2 2 9 ET D75LE6 3 9 0 9 2 3 ET D75LE8 0 4 0 2 0 3 ET D75LE10 2 6 0 6 1 5 ET D75LE20 1 7 0 5 1 0 ET D75LE30 40 15 20 15 0 6 1 2 0 4 0 7 ET D75LE40 40 15 20 15 0 4 0 7 0 2 0 4 ET D75LE50 22 15 8 8 2 0 4 9 1 2 2 9 ENGLISH 33 Chapter 2 Getting Started Setting up When using the optional Upgrade Kit Model No ET UK20 Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE Only for KEYSTONE KEYSTONE and CURVED used together Only for CURVED Projection Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal lens Model keystone keystone keystone keystone Min value of Min value of Min value of Min value of No correction correction correction correction R2 L2 R3 L3 R2 L2 R3 L3 angle a angle B angle a angle f ET D75LE1 40 40 20 15 0 8 1 8 0 5 1 0 ET D75LE2 40 40 20 15 0 6 1 2 0 4 0 7 ET
100. 3 29 13 37 20 07 20 08 33 57 33 57 53 47 53 19 100 02 6 71 8 03 8 89 350 4 358 7 748 11 62 15 52 15 61 23 43 23 44 39 18 39 19 62 40 62 12 116 75 7 84 9 38 10 16 400 4 981 8 855 13 29 17 76 17 85 26 79 26 80 44 80 44 80 71 33 71 05 133 48 8 96 10 73 12 70 500 6 226 11 069 16 63 22 22 22 33 33 51 33 52 56 03 56 03 89 19 88 91 1166 95 11 22 13 43 15 24 600 7 472 13 283 19 97 26 69 26 82 40 24 40 25 67 26 67 26 107 04 1106 77 200 41 13 47 16 14 25 40 1000 12 453 22 138 33 34 44 54 44 75 67 13 67 15 112 18 112 18 178 47 178 20 22 49 26 94 Lens type Zoom lens Fixed focus lens Projection lens Model No ET D75LE10 ET D75LE20 ET D75LE30 ET D75LE40 ET D75LE5 ET D75LE50 Throw ratio 1 4 1 8 1 1 8 2 6 1 2 6 5 1 1 5 0 8 0 1 0 8 1 0 7 1 Projection screen size Projection distance L Height i Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max A Diagonal SD SH Width SW LW LT Lw LT w LT aw LT Fixed Fixed 1 78 70 0 872 1 550 2 13 2 75 275 4 00 3 97 7 74 7 66 12 31 1 12 1 13 2 03 80 0 996 1 771 2 44 3 16 3 15 4 59 4 55 8 88 8 78 14 09 1 29 1 30 2 29 90 1 121 1 992 2 76 3 57 3 56 5 17 5 14 10 01 9 90 15 87 1 47 1 47 2 54 100 1 245 2 214 3 08 3 98 3 96 5 76 5 72 11 14 11 01 17 65 1 64 1 64 3 05 120 1 494 2 657 3 71 4 79
101. 3KE PT DS12KE Switches the input to SDI1 i DIT PT DZ10KE Switches the input to SDI SDI2 Switches the input to SDI2 DUAL Turns on two lamps LAMP SELECT SINGLE Turns on one lamp The lamp with shorter runtime will automatically light HIGH Sets the lamp brightness to high luminance MIDDLE Sets the lamp brightness to slightly lower luminance compared to LAMP POWER HIGH NORMAL 5 Sets the lamp brightness to high luminance ECO Sets the lamp brightness to low luminance OFF P IN P function is not used P IN P USER1 Lays out the sub screen with the settings of USER1 USER2 Lays out the sub screen with the settings of USER2 USER3 Lays out the sub screen with the settings of USER3 1 Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DZ10KE 2 Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE 3 Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE Even when the command for HIGH is set it is not reflected at the execution if the optional Replacement lamp unit for portrait mode Model No ET LAD320P 1 pc ET LAD320PW 2 pcs is used 4 Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE 5 Only for PT DZ10KE 10 Press the ENTER button The COMMAND detailed screen is displayed 11 Press A to select a COMMAND e For COMMAND which requires detailed settings the items of the detailed settings will switch each time you press q gt 12 Press the ENTER button The command is fixed and is displayed at the left of the se
102. 4 9 75 15 59 15 30 29 04 1 92 2 30 2 03 80 1 219 1 626 3 28 4 38 4 42 6 65 6 66 11 15 11 16 17 83 17 55 33 24 221 2 64 2 29 90 1 372 1 829 3 70 4 94 4 98 7 49 7 50 12 56 12 57 20 07 19 79 37 44 249 2 98 2 54 100 1 524 2 032 4 12 5 50 5 55 8 33 8 34 13 97 13 98 22 31 22 03 41 64 277 3 32 3 05 120 1 829 2 438 4 96 6 62 6 67 10 02 10 03 16 79 16 80 26 79 26 51 50 04 3 34 4 00 3 81 150 2 286 3 048 6 21 8 30 8 36 12 55 12 56 21 02 21 03 33 52 33 24 62 64 4 19 5 01 5 08 200 3 048 4 064 8 831 11 11 11 17 16 77 16 78 28 07 28 07 44 72 44 44 83 63 5 60 6 71 6 35 250 3 810 5 080 10 41 13 91 13 99 20 99 21 00 35 12 35 12 55 93 55 65 104 63 7 01 8 40 7 62 300 4 572 6 096 12 51 16 71 16 80 25 21 25 22 42 16 42 17 67 14 66 86 125 63 8 43 10 10 8 89 350 5 334 7 112 14 60 19 51 19 61 29 43 29 44 49 21 49 22 78 34 78 07 146 63 9 84 11 80 10 16 400 6 096 8 128 16 70 22 31 22 43 33 65 33 66 56 26 56 26 89 55 89 28 167 63 11 26 13 49 12 70 500 7 620 10 160 20 89 27 92 28 05 42 09 42 10 70 35 70 36 111 96 111 69 209 62 14 08 16 88 15 24 600 9 144 12 192 125 09 33 52 33 68 50 53 50 54 84 45 84 45 134 38 134 11 251 62 16 91 20 27 25 40 1000 15 240 20 320 41 86 55 93 56 18 84 29 84
103. 4 Settings DISPLAY OPTION menu Note Backup function is enabled when BACKUP INPUT MODE is set to ON or 1 and the same signal is input to the lt DVI D IN and HDMI IN terminals Backup function is also enabled when BACKUP INPUT MODE is set to 2 and the same signal is input to the lt SDI IN 1 and lt SDI IN 2 terminals To switch to the backup input signal using the backup function make sure that the following three conditions are satisfied to be ready to use the function Set BACKUP INPUT MODE to ON 1 or 2 Input the same signal to the primary and secondary inputs Display the image of the primary input If the input is switched to other than the primary or secondary input while the backup function is ready for use the state of readiness to use the backup function is canceled To switch to the backup input signal using the backup function again switch to the primary input When BACKUP INPUT MODE is set to ON 1 or 2 BACKUP INPUT STATUS is displayed both in the input guide page 103 and on the STATUS screen pages 62 120 When switching to the backup input signal is possible using the backup function ACTIVE is displayed in BACKUP INPUT STATUS When itis not possible INACTIVE is displayed instead When BACKUP INPUT STATUS is ACTIVE while the image of the primary input is displayed the secondary input becomes the backup input When BACKUP INPUT STATUS is ACTIVE
104. 43 2 90 3 81 150 2 286 3 048 4 53 6 05 6 09 9 15 9 16 15 34 15 35 24 49 24 21 45 72 3 05 3 65 5 08 200 3 048 4 064 6 06 8 10 8 15 12 24 12 25 20 50 20 50 32 69 32 40 61 08 4 08 4 89 6 35 250 3 810 5 080 7 59 10 15 10 21 15 33 15 34 25 65 25 66 40 88 40 60 76 44 5 12 6 13 7 62 300 4 572 6 096 9 13 12 19 12 27 18 41 18 42 30 81 30 81 49 08 48 80 91 79 6 15 7 37 8 89 350 5 334 7 112 10 66 14 24 14 32 21 50 21 51 35 96 35 97 57 28 57 00 107 15 7 19 8 61 10 16 400 6 096 8 128 12 19 16 29 16 38 24 58 24 60 41 12 41 12 65 47 65 19 122 51 8 22 9 85 12 70 500 7 620 10 160 15 26 20 39 20 50 30 76 30 77 51 42 51 43 81 87 81 59 153 23 10 29 12 33 15 24 600 9 144 12 192 18 33 24 49 24 61 36 93 36 94 61 73 61 74 98 26 97 98 183 95 12 36 14 81 25 40 1000 15 240 20 320 30 60 40 88 41 07 61 62 61 63 102 97 102 98 163 83 163 56 20 64 24 73 Lens type Zoom lens Fixed focus lens Projection lens Model No ET D75LE10 ET D75LE20 ET D75LE30 ET D75LE40 ET D75LE5 ET D75LE50 Throw ratio 1 4 1 8 1 1 8 2 6 1 2 6 5 1 1 5 0 8 0 1 0 8 1 0 8 1 Projection screen size Projection distance L 5 Height P Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max A 5 Diagonal SD SH Width SW LW LT tW LT w LT w LT Fixed Fixed 1 78 70 1
105. 56 25 kHz Vertical 50 Hz The SYNC HD and VD terminals do not support 3 value SYNC For DVI D signal 525i 480i 625i 576i 525p 480p 625p 576p 750 720 60p 750 720 50p 1125 1080 60i 1125 1080 50i 1125 1080 24p 1125 1080 24sF 1125 1080 25p 1125 1080 30p 1125 1080 60p 1125 1080 50p Displayable resolution VGA to WUXGA non interlaced Dot clock frequency 25 MHz to 162 MHz For HDMI signal 525i 480i 625i 576i 525p 480p 625p 576p 750 720 60p 750 720 50p 1125 1080 60i 1125 1080 50i 1125 1080 24p 1125 1080 24sF 1125 1080 25p 1125 1080 30p 1125 1080 60p 1125 1080 50p Displayable resolution VGA to WUXGA non interlaced Dot clock frequency 25 MHz to 162 MHz For SDI signal Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DZ10KE SD SDI signal SMPTE ST 259 compliant YCgCp 4 2 2 10 bit 480i 576i SMPTE ST 292 compliant YPgPg 4 2 2 10 bit 720 50p 720 60p 1035 60i 1080 50i 1080 60i 1080 25p 1080 24p 1080 24sF 1080 30p SMPTE ST 372 compliant RGB 4 4 4 12 bit 10 bit 1080 50i 1080 60i 1080 25p 1080 24p 1080 24sF 1080 30p X Y Z 4 4 4 12 bit 2048 x 1080 24p 2048 x 1080 24sF SMPTE ST 424 compliant YPgPg 4 2 2 10 bit 1080 50p 1080 60p RGB 4 4 4 12 bit 10 bit 1080 50i 1080 60i 1080 25p 1080 24p 1080 24sF 1080 30p e The 3G SDI signal is only compatible with SDI1 Single link HD SDI signal Dual link H
106. 57 1 6 to 2 0 1 4 3 Max LT L 1 6367 x SD 0 1085 Min LW L 1 4312 x SD 0 0832 1 7 to 2 4 1 16 10 Max LT L 2 0795 x SD 0 1162 Min LW L 1 4709 x SD 0 0832 ET D75LE20 1 7 to 2 4 1 16 9 Max LT L 2 1373 x SD 0 1162 Min LW L 1 6202 x SD 0 0832 2 0 to 2 9 1 4 3 Max LT L 2 3542 x SD 0 1162 42 ENGLISH Chapter 2 Getting Started Setting up Projection lens Model No Throw ratio Aspect ratio Projection distance L formula Min LW L 2 0647 x SD 0 1131 2 4 to 4 7 1 16 10 Max LT L 4 0041 x SD 0 1765 Min LW L 2 1221 x SD 0 1131 ET D75LE30 2 4 to 4 7 1 16 9 Max LT L 4 1155 x SD 0 1765 Min LW L 2 3374 x SD 0 1131 2 9 to 5 6 1 4 3 Max LT L 4 5330 x SD 0 1765 Min LW L 3 9532 x SD 0 1577 4 6 to 7 4 1 16 10 Max LT L 6 3027 x SD 0 1615 Min LW L 4 0631 x SD 0 1577 ET D75LE40 4 6 to 7 4 1 16 9 Max LT L 6 4779 x SD 0 1615 Min LW L 4 4754 x SD 0 1577 5 5 to 8 9 1 4 3 Max LT L 7 1351 x SD 0 1615 E Fixed focus lens Projection lens Model No Throw ratio Aspect ratio Projection distance L formula 0 7 1 16 10 L 7 0 6063 x SD 0 0835 ET D75LE5 0 7 1 16 9 L 7 0 6220 x SD 0 0835 0 8 1 4 3 L 7 0 6850 x SD 0 0835 0 7 1
107. 6 ENGLISH Chapter 5 Maintenance Troubleshooting Problems Points to be checked Page Is the 3D INPUT FORMAT setting of 3D SETTINGS correct 92 3D function is not working Check the 3D eyewear settings s a signal which is supported by the projector being input 181 Left and right images are Are the devices synchronized Check the 3D eyewear settings reversed not showing properly Change the LEFT RIGHT SWAP setting of 3D SETTINGS 93 image inthe3D eyewear Are you within the reception range flickers Are batteries of the 3D eyewear drained If you use the rechargeable 3D eyewear charge it If you use the battery powered 3D eyewear replace the battery s the 3D SETTINGS setting correct 91 3D eyewear is not functioning Attention f problems persist even after checking the preceding points consult your dealer ENGLISH 167 Chapter6 Appendix This chapter describes specifications and after sales service for the projector 168 ENGLISH Chapter 6 Appendix Technical information Technical information The network function of this projector supports the PJLink class 1 and the PJLink protocol can be used to perform projector setting and projector status query operations from a computer Control commands The following table lists the PJLink protocol commands that can be used to control the projector x characters in ta
108. 7 Chapter4 Settings PICTURE menu sRGB is an international standard IEC61966 2 1 for color reproduction defined by IEC International Electrotechnical Commission Set according to the following steps to reproduce more faithful SRGB compliant colors 1 Set COLOR MATCHING adjustments to OFF Refer to COLOR MATCHING 9 page 96 2 Display the PICTURE menu e Refer to IPICTURE menu page 71 3 Press AY to select PICTURE MODE 4 Press 4b to set NATURAL 5 Press A V to select COLOR 6 Press the DEFAULT button on the remote control to set the factory default setting 7 Follow Steps 5 to 6 to set TINT COLOR TEMPERATURE GAMMA and SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW to the factory default settings Note sRGB is available for RGB signal input only 78 ENGLISH Chapter4 Settings POSITION menu POSITION menu menu On the menu screen select POSITION from the main menu and select an item from the sub Refer to Navigating through the menu page 65 for the operation of the menu screen e After selecting the item press A V b to set I Move the image position vertically or horizontally if the image position projected on the screen is shifted even when the relative position of the projector and the screen is installed correctly 1 Press A V to select SHIFT 2 Press the ENTER button The SHIFT screen is displayed 3 Press A W 4b to adj
109. 8 75 36 41 35 96 57 43 5 48 10 16 400 4 981 8 855 11 59 14 99 14 86 21 60 21 45 41 64 41 12 65 65 6 27 12 70 500 6 226 11 069 14 51 18 76 18 60 27 03 26 84 52 09 51 44 82 11 7 85 15 24 600 7 472 13 283 17 44 22 54 22 33 32 46 32 23 62 54 61 76 98 56 9 44 25 40 1000 12 453 22 138 29 12 37 63 37 28 54 17 53 79 104 36 103 05 164 38 15 78 1 36 ENGLISH The throw ratio is based on the value during projection onto a 3 81 m 150 screen size Chapter 2 Getting Started Setting up B When the screen aspect is 4 3 Unit m Lens type Zoom lens Projection lens Model No ET D75LE1 ET D75LE2 ET D75LE3 ET D75LE4 ET D75LE8 ET D75LE6 Throw ratio 1 6 2 2 1 2 2 3 3 1 3 3 5 5 1 5 6 8 9 1 8 8 16 5 1 1 1 1 3 1 Projection screen size Projection distance L B Height gt Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Diagona SP sq WP E en ew m aw ery ew er QW CD aw Lr 1 78 70 1 067 1 422 2 29 3 06 3 09 4 65 4 66 7 83 7 83 12 54 12 25 23 32 1 54 1 84 2 03 80 1 219 1 626 2 63 3 51 3 55 5 33 5 34 8 96 8 97 14 34 14 06 26 71 1 77 2 11 2 29 90 1 372 1 829 2 96
110. ANCE screen is displayed 7 Press A V to select WHITE BALANCE HIGH or WHITE BALANCE LOW 8 Press the ENTER button The WHITE BALANCE HIGH screen or the WHITE BALANCE LOW screen is displayed 9 Press A V to select RED GREEN or BLUE 10 Press 4P to adjust the level Item Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment Press the gt button Deepens red RED Press the lt button Weakens red WHITE BALANCE HIGH 0 255 factory default is GREEN Press the gt button Deepens green 255 i Press the 4 button Weakens green WHITE BALANCE LOW 127 127 factory default is Press the gt button Deepens blue 0 BLUE Press the button Weakens blue Note Adjust COLOR TEMPERATURE correctly All colors will not be displayed properly unless adequate adjustment is made If the adjustment does not look suitable you can press the DEFAULT button on the remote control to return the setting for the selected item only to the factory default setting Adjusting desired white balance based on existing color temperature settings 1 Press A V to select COLOR TEMPERATURE 2 Press 4 or the ENTER button The COLOR TEMPERATURE individual adjustment screen is displayed 3 Press 4b to select an item other than DEFAULT USER1 or USER2 ENGLISH 73 Chapter4 Settings PICTURE menu 4 Press the ENTER button The CHANGE TO s
111. Adjusting the focus zoom and shift page 56 for details 1 Press A V 4b to adjust the focus ADJUST 2 Press the lt MENU gt button to proceed to the initial setting EATE Select the language to show on the screen After completed the initial setting you can change the display language from the DISPLAY LANGUAGE menu 1 Press A V to select the display language INITIAL SETTING 113 Please select DISPLAY LANGUAGE SELECT SET 2 Press the lt ENTER gt button to proceed to the initial setting 22 ENGLISH Chapter 1 Preparation Start up display Initial setting installati a Set PROJECTION METHOD and COOLING CONDITION depending on the installation mode Refer to Installation mode page 31 for details Set HIGH ALTITUDE MODE to ON when using the projector at high altitudes between 1 400 m 4 593 or higher and lower than 2 700 m 8 858 above sea level After completed the initial setting you can change the settings of each item from the PROJECTOR SETUP menu 1 Press AY to select an item 2 Press 4b to switch the setting INITIAL SETTING 2 3 PROJECTION METHOD E FRONT FLOOR Q When PROJECTION METHOD is changed confirm that COOLING CONDITION is set correctly AUTO It may shorten the life of the lamp and projector if used in incorrect setting Switch to HIGH ALTITUDE MODE ON if over 1400m 4593Ft MENUSELECT 4b CHANGE G9 SET 3 Press t
112. D SDI signal 3G SDI signal 1 Pixel Repetition signal dot clock frequency 27 0 MHz only 2 Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE ENGLISH 185 Chapter 6 Appendix Specifications E Terminal RGB 1 IN terminal 1 set BNC x 5 RGB YPsPA YCsC4 YC x 1 RGB signal YPgPg signal Y C signal 0 7 V p p 75 Q SYNC ON GREEN 1 0 V p p 75 Q SYNC HD TTL high impedance automatic positive negative polarity compatible VD TTL high impedance automatic positive negative polarity compatible Y 1 0 V p p including synchronization signal PgPp 0 7 V p p 75 Q Y 1 0 V p p C 0 286 V p p 75 O RGB 2 IN terminal 1 set high density D Sub 15 p female RGB signal YPgP5 signal 0 7 V p p 75 Q SYNC ON GREEN 1 0 V p p 75 Q SYNC HD TTL high impedance automatic positive negative polarity compatible VD TTL high impedance automatic positive negative polarity compatible Y 1 0 V p p including synchronization signal PgPp 0 7 V p p 75 Q lt DVI D IN terminal 1 set DVI D 24 p single link DVI 1 0 compliant HDCP compatible lt HDMI IN terminal 1 set HDMI 19 pin HDCP compatible Deep Color compatible lt VIDEO IN gt terminal 1 set BNC 1 0 V p p 75 Q lt SDI IN 1 gt terminal Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE SDI IN terminal Only for PT DZ10KE 1 set BNC SD SDI signal HD SDI signal 3G SDI signal Dual link HD SDI LINK A signal SMPTE ST
113. DICOM is an abbreviation of Digital Imaging and COmmunication in Medicine and is a standard for medical imaging devices Although the DICOM name is used the projector is not a medical device and should not be used for purposes such as diagnosis of display images Press the ENTER button when each PICTURE MODE is selected to save as a specified value when a new signal is input The data of all items except SYSTEM SELECTOR in the PICTURE menu is saved n the factory default settings USER is set to images that comply with the ITU R BT 709 standard Changing the USER name 1 Press A to select PICTURE MODE 2 Press 4b to select USER 3 Press the ENTER button The PICTURE MODE detailed screen is displayed 4 Press A V to select PICTURE MODE NAME CHANGE and press the ENTER button The PICTURE MODE NAME CHANGE screen is displayed 5 Press A V 4b to select the text and press the ENTER button to enter the text 6 Press A V 4 to select OK and press the ENTER button The picture mode name is changed CONTRAST 1 You can adjust the contrast of the colors 1 Press A V to select CONTRAST ENGLISH 71 Chapter4 Settings PICTURE menu 2 Press 4b or the ENTER button The CONTRAST individual adjustment screen is displayed 3 Press 4b to adjust the level Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment Press the gt button Brightens the screen and
114. DMI gt lt SDI 1 2 gt buttons on the control panel or the remote control The image of the signal being input in the selected terminal is projected Attention Images may not be projected properly depending on the external device or the blu ray disc or DVD disc to be played back Set the PICTURE menu SYSTEM SELECTOR Confirm the aspect ratio of the projection screen and the image and switch to an optimum aspect ratio from the POSITION menu gt ASPECT adjusting the f Lshif If the projected image or the position is not correct when the positioning of the projector and the screen is correctly installed adjust the focus zoom and shift Using the control panel 1 Press the LENS button on the control panel Pressing the button changes the adjustment menu in the order of FOCUS ZOOM and SHIFT 2 Select each item and press AW to adjust it Using the remote control 1 Press the lens lt FOCUS gt lt ZOOM gt lt SHIFT gt buttons on the remote control e FOCUS button Adjusts focus e ZOOM button Adjusts zoom e lt SHIFT gt button Adjusts shift 2 Select each item and press A W lt P to adjust it Caution During the lens shift operation do not insert your hand in any opening around the lens Your hand may be caught and result in injuries Note The zoom adjust menu will not be displayed when the projection lens without the zoom function is attached
115. E Widens the lock in range Note Switch the range that determines that a signal to be input is the same signal that is already registered To prioritize the determination that it is the same signal that is already registered set to the WIDE setting Use in cases such as when the synchronizing frequency of a signal to be input has changed slightly or multiple signal lists are registered Can only be used when a signal is input from the RGB 1 IN terminal RGB 2 IN terminal DVI D IN terminal or lt HDMI IN terminal When WIDE is set the image may appear distorted because a signal is determined to be the same signal even if a synchronizing frequency changes slightly When a signal to be input corresponds to multiple signals set in WIDE a registered signal with a high memory number receives priority Example a signal to be input that corresponds to memory numbers A2 A4 and B1 will be determined to be B1 When a registration signal is deleted the settings are also deleted n an environment where multiple types of signals are input to the same terminal signals are sometimes not determined correctly when the setting is set to WIDE ENGLISH 131 Chapter 4 Settings SIGNAL LIST menu Sub memory 0 DJ BDr The projector has a sub memory function that can register the multiple image adjustment data even if it is recognized as the same signal by the frequency or format of
116. E50 Throw ratio 1 6 2 0 1 2 0 2 9 1 2 9 5 6 1 5 5 8 9 1 0 8 1 0 8 1 Projection screen size Projection distance L Height Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max A Diagonal SD SH Width SW LW LT Lw LT w LT w LT Fixed Fixed 1 78 70 1 067 1 422 2 17 2 80 2 80 4 07 4 04 7 88 7 80 12 52 1 13 1 15 2 03 80 1 219 1 626 2 49 3 22 3 21 4 67 4 64 9 03 8 94 14 34 1 31 1 33 2 29 90 1 372 1 829 2 81 3 68 3 62 5 27 5 23 10 19 10 07 16 15 1 48 1 50 2 54 100 1 524 2 032 3 18 4 05 4 03 5 86 5 82 11 34 11 21 17 96 1 66 1 67 3 05 120 1 829 2 438 3 77 4 88 4 86 7 06 7 01 13 64 13 48 21 59 2 00 2 02 3 81 150 2 286 3 048 4 74 6 18 6 09 8 85 8 79 17 09 16 89 27 02 2 53 2 55 5 08 200 3 048 4 064 6 35 8 21 8 15 11 84 11 76 22 85 22 58 36 09 3 40 3 42 6 35 250 3 810 5 080 7 96 10 28 10 20 14 83 14 73 28 61 28 26 45 15 4 27 4 29 7 62 300 4 572 6 096 9 56 12 36 12 26 17 82 17 70 34 36 33 94 54 21 5 14 5 17 8 89 350 5 334 7 112 11 17 14 44 14 32 20 81 20 67 40 12 39 63 63 27 6 04 10 16 400 6 096 8 128 12 78 16 52 16 38 23 80 23 63 45 88 45 31 72 33 6 91 12 70 500 7 620 10 16 16 00 20 68 20 49 29 78 29 57 57 39 56 68 90 45 8 66 15 24 600 9 144 12 192 19 21 24 83 24 61 35 76 35 51 68 91 68 05 1108 58
117. ECURITY PASSWORD screen when the power is turned on with the MAIN POWER switch set to the OFF side When the entered password is incorrect the operation will be restricted to the power standby d button the lt SHUTTER gt button and the LENS lt FOCUS gt lt ZOOM gt lt SHIFT gt buttons 1 Press A V to select SECURITY PASSWORD 2 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button OFF Disables the security password entry ON Enables the security password entry Note e The SECURITY PASSWORD setting is set to OFF by the factory default or when ALL USER DATA in INITIALIZE page 125 is executed Change the password periodically that is hard to guess e The security password is enabled after setting SECURITY PASSWORD to ON and turning the MAIN POWER switch to OFF Change the security password 1 Press A V to select SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE 2 Press the ENTER button The SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE screen is displayed 3 Press A WV 49 and the number 0 lt 9 gt buttons to set the password Up to eight button operations can be set 4 Press the ENTER button 5 Re enter the password for the confirmation 6 Press the ENTER button Note The entered password is displayed with marks on the screen ENGLISH 133 Chapter 4 Settings SECURITY menu When numerical values are used for the secur
118. EL BLACK BORDER LEVEL Note BRIGHTNESS ADJUST is a function that makes the increased brightness in black level of the overlapping image area difficult to notice when EDGE BLENDING is used to configure multiple screens The optimal point of correction is set by adjusting NON OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL so the black level of the overlapping image area will be the same level as the non overlapping area If the border area of the part where the image is overlapping and the non overlapping part gets brighter after adjusting NON OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL adjust the width of the top bottom left or right Adjust BLACK BORDER LEVEL when the width adjustment makes only the border area darker The joining part may look discontinuous depending on the position you are looking from when a screen with high gain or rear screen is used When configuring multiple screens using both horizontal and vertical edge blending adjust OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL first before making adjustments in Step 12 Adjustment method is same as the procedure of NON OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL f only horizontal or vertical edge blending is used set all items in OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL to 0 AUTO TESTPATTERN settings change together with the AUTO TESTPATTERN of COLOR MATCHING Adjustment of the tilt of the border between NON OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL and BLACK BORDER LEVEL is a function to perform the adjustment of GEOMETRY 9 page 81 together with the edge blendi
119. ENTER button The SECURITY PASSWORD screen is displayed Enter a security password and press the ENTER button The INITIALIZE screen is displayed Press A VW to select an item to initialize Returns all setting items including REGISTERED SIGNAL NETWORK SETUP E mail set up ALL USER DATA and USER LOGO to factory default settings The projector will go into the standby status to reflect the setting values Deletes all the setting values saved for each input signal REGISTERED SIGNAL To delete only a part of a registered signal perform the procedure described in Deleting the registered signal page 130 NETWORK E MAIL Returns NETWORK SETUP and E mail set up to factory default settings LOGO IMAGE Deletes the image registered in USER LOGO ENGLISH 125 Chapter4 Settings PROJECTOR SETUP menu 5 Press the ENTER button 6 When the confirmation screen is displayed press 4P to select OK and press the ENTER button SERVICE PASSWORD 11 11 11 This function is used by a service person 126 ENGLISH Chapter 4 Settings P IN P menu P IN P menu On the menu screen select P IN P from the main menu and select an item from the sub menu Refer to Navigating through the menu page 65 for the operation of the menu screen e After selecting the item press A V 4P to set Locate a separate small sub screen in the main s
120. FAULT MODE is not displayed CLOCK PHASE 0 00 You can adjust to achieve an optimal image when there is a flickering image or smeared outlines 1 Press A V to select CLOCK PHASE 2 Press 4b or the ENTER button The CLOCK PHASE individual adjustment screen is displayed 3 Press 4b to adjust Adjustment value will change between 0 and 31 Adjust so that the amount of interference is at a minimum Note Certain signals may not be adjustable Optimal value may not be achieved if the output from the input computer is unstable Optimal value may not be achieved when there is a shift in the total dot numbers CLOCK PHASE can be adjusted only when a signal is input to the RGB 1 IN terminal or the RGB 2 IN terminal CLOCK PHASE cannot be adjusted when a digital signal is input f you press gt while the adjustment value is 31 the value will become 0 If you press while the adjustment value is 0 the value will become 31 GEOMETRY p J J Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DZ10KE You can correct various types of distortion in a projected image Unique image processing technology enables projection of a square image on a special screen shape 1 Press AY to select GEOMETRY 2 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button OFF Does not perform geometric adjustment KEYSTONE Adjus
121. G LARGE SCREEN CORRECTION Corrects the phenomenon in which colors that appear lighter when viewed on a large screen viewed from a close distance compared to when viewed on an average screen size so that colors appear the same 1 Press A V to select LARGE SCREEN CORRECTION 2 Press 4b to switch the item OFF Performs no correction 1 Performs weak correction 2 Performs strong correction SCREEN SETTING gt 1 11 Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DZ10KE Set the screen size When changing the aspect of a projected image correct to the optimum image position for the set screen Set as necessary for the screen in use 1 Press A V to select SCREEN SETTING 2 Press the ENTER button The SCREEN SETTING screen is displayed ENGLISH 97 Chapter 4 Settings DISPLAY OPTION menu 3 Press 4b to switch the SCREEN FORMAT item The items will switch each time you press the button Model No SCREEN FORMAT Range when SCREEN POSITION is selected 16 10 Cannot be adjusted PT DZ13KE PT DZ10KE 4 3 Adjusts the horizontal position between 160 and 160 16 9 Adjusts the vertical position between 60 and 60 4 3 Cannot be adjusted PT DS12KE m 16 9 Adjusts the vertical position between 132 and 131 4 Press A V to select SCREEN POSITION If SCREEN FORMAT is set to 16 10 in PT DZ13KE and PT DZ10KE or SCREEN FORMAT
122. G TEST amp lang e P BS X 2 Projector control window x LU SOWorkeonfia Ad o Ping te b from from r1 F 2 100 packet loss 1 Input IP address 3 Example of display when the connection has succeeded Enter the IP address of the server to be tested 4 Example of display when the connection has failed 2 Submit Executes the connection test ENGLISH 147 Chapter 4 Settings NETWORK menu E mail set up page When there is a problem or the runtime of a lamp reaches a set value an E mail can be sent to preset E mail addresses up to two addresses Click Detailed set up E mail set up B http 192 168 0 8 eg bin main cgitpage MAIL_SETBJang e 1 ENABLE Select Enable to use the E mail function 2 SMTP SERVER NAME P BCX GB Projector control window x I ENABLE 1 Up to 63 characters 2 SMTP SERVER NAME MAIL FROM MEMO MINIMUM TIME INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Em cnr Enter the IP address or the server name of the E mail server SMTP To enter the server name the DNS server needs to be set up 3 MAIL FROM Enter the E mail address of the projector Up to 63 characters in single byte 4 MEMO Enter information such as the location of the projector that notifies the sender of the E mail Up to 63 characters in single byte 148 ENGLISH MINIMUM TIME Change the minimum interval for the temperature warning E mail
123. GAMMA Press 4 or the ENTER button The GAMMA individual adjustment screen is displayed Press q gt to select USER1 or USER2 Press the ENTER button The GAMMA screen is displayed Press the ENTER button The GAMMA NAME CHANGE screen is displayed Press A V 4b to select the text and press the ENTER button to enter the text Press A V 4b to select OK and press the ENTER button The selected gamma name is changed Note When a name is changed display of USER1 USER2 is also changed SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW You can correct the image to the optimal vividness even if it is projected under a bright light 1 2 3 Press A V to select SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW Press 4 or the ENTER button The SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW individual adjustment screen is displayed Press 4P to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button OFF No correction 1 Corrects the image to weaken vividness 2 Corrects the image to medium vividness 3 Corrects the image to high vividness SHARPNESS 1 1 1 You can adjust the sharpness of the projected image 1 2 3 Press AY to select SHARPNESS Press 4 gt or the ENTER button The SHARPNESS individual adjustment screen is displayed Press q gt to adjust the level Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment Press the gt button Contours
124. HOD FRONT FLOOR 109 COOLING CONDITION AUTO 110 HIGH ALTITUDE MODE OFF 110 LAMP SELECT DUAL 110 LAMP RELAY OFF 111 LAMP POWER HIGH 112 BRIGHTNESS CONTROL 112 STANDBY MODE NORMAL 116 SCHEDULE OFF 117 STARTUP INPUT SELECT LAST USED 118 RS 232C 119 STATUS 120 NO SIGNAL SHUT OFF DISABLE 121 REMOTE2 MODE DEFAULT 122 FUNCTION BUTTON 122 DATE AND TIME 122 LENS CALIBRATION 123 LENS MEMORY 123 SAVE ALL USER DATA 125 LOAD ALL USER DATA 125 INITIALIZE 125 SERVICE PASSWORD 126 1 Itis NORMAL for PT DZ10KE In the portrait setting it is MIDDLE for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE P IN P LH Details page 127 TEST PATTERN E Details page 129 SIGNAL LIST E Details amp page 130 SECURITY KX Sub menu item Factory default Page SECURITY PASSWORD OFF 133 SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE 133 DISPLAY SETTING OFF 134 TEXT CHANGE 134 CONTROL DEVICE SETUP 134 CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE 135 ENGLISH 69 Chapter 4 Settings Menu navigation NETWORK 33 Sub menu item Factory default Page NETWORK SETUP 137 NETWORK CONTROL 137 NETWORK STATUS 138 Art Net SETUP OFF 138 Note e Some items may not be adjusted or used for certain signal formats to be input to the projector
125. IN POWER switch on the projector is set to ON when the power is switched off standby mode 3 VIDEO button Switches the input to VIDEO 4 RGB1 button Switches the input to RGB1 5 RGB2 button Switches the input to RGB2 6 lt DVI D gt button Switches the input to DVI D 7 lt HDMI gt button Switches the input to HDMI 8 SDI 1 2 button Switches the input to SDI Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DZ10KE 26 ENGLISH 10 11 12 13 14 MENU button Displays or hides the main menu page 65 Returns to the previous menu when a sub menu is displayed If you press the MENU button on the control panel for at least three seconds while the on screen display is off the on screen display is turned on LENS button Adjusts the focus zoom and shift position of the lens ENTER button Determines and executes an item in the menu screen lt SHUTTER gt button Used to temporarily turn off the image page 61 AV lt gt buttons Use to select items in the menu screen change settings and adjust levels Also used to enter a password in SECURITY or enter characters AUTO SETUP button Automatically adjusts the image display position while projecting the image PROGRESS is displayed on the screen while adjusting automatically page 62 Chapter 1 Preparation About your projector E Connecting terminals 1 2 3 REMOTE 2 IN
126. ITION is selected in Step 6 press the ENTER button 11 Press A V 4b to adjust the position and press the MENU button ENGLISH 127 Chapter 4 Settings P IN P menu 12 If CLOCK PHASE is selected in Step 6 press 4 to make adjustment 13 Press A V to select FRAME LOCK 14 Press 4P to switch the item MAIN WINDOW Set frame lock to the input signal set in the main window SUB WINDOW Set frame lock to the input signal set in the sub window 15 Press AY to select TYPE 16 Press 4P to switch the item MAIN WINDOW The main window has display priority SUB WINDOW The sub window has display priority Note The P IN P function may not be available for some signals being input or terminals being selected Refer to Two window display combination list page 178 for details The main window setting values are applied to image adjustment values such as PICTURE MODE GAMMA and COLOR TEMPERATURE On the main screen when no menu is displayed press to switch the sizes and positions of the main window and sub window while P IN P is operating When FRAME RESPONSE is set to other than NORMAL P IN P cannot be set When BACKUP INPUT MODE is set to ON 1 or 2 P IN P cannot be set 3D images cannot be displayed in P IN P Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE The P IN P state continues while the P IN P function is used even if 3D
127. KEYSTONE VERTICAL ARC EE LA O rj L 82 ENGLISH HORIZONTAL ARC T L A L HI uu Chapter4 Settings POSITION menu CURVED VERTICAL BALANCE HORIZONTAL BALANCE LI EEA FA EE eH MAINTAIN ASPECT RATIO Select ON to correct while keeping the aspect ratio Setting CORNER CORRECTION 1 Press AY to select GEOMETRY 2 Press 4b to select CORNER CORRECTION 3 Press the ENTER button The GEOMETRY CORNER CORRECTION screen is displayed 4 Press A V to select the item to adjust and press t
128. L KEYSTONE CURVED Adjustment range of Vertical arc Maximum 50 1 Horizontal arc Maximum 50 1 Vertical arc Maximum 100 Horizontal arc Maximum 100 1 CUSTOM MASKING Cannot be used The image can be masked in optional form PC CORRECTION of UNIFORMITY Cannot be used The brightness and unevenness of color of the entire screen can be corrected 1 The adjustment range of the menu Refer to GEOMETRY projection range page 33 for the possible projection range For details refer to the Operating Instructions included in the CD ROM of the optional Upgrade Kit Model No ET UK20 List of blaai The following table specifies the video signals compatible with the projector e Symbols that indicate formats are as follows V VIDEO Y C R RGB Y YCgCrR YPePR D DVI D H HDMI S SDI Scanning freq Dot clock Plug and play Mode S Horizontal Vertical freq Format DVI D kHz Hz MHz ROB EDID1 EDID2 EDID3 MI gens UTD 720 x 480i 15 7 59 9 V PAL PAL N SECAM 720 x 576i 15 6 50 0 V 525i 480i 720 x 480i 15 7 59 9 13 5 R YIS 625i 576i 720 x 576i 15 6 50 0 13 5 R YIS 525i 480i 720 1440 x480i3 15 7 59 9 27 0 D H 625i 576i 720 1440 x 576i 15 6 50 0 27 0 D H 525p 480
129. LISH Chapter 1 Preparation Precautions for use Optional accessories product name Model No zc lens ET D75LE6 ET D75LE8 ET D75LE10 ET D75LE20 Projection lens ET D75LE30 ET D75LE40 Fixed focus lens ET D75LE50 Ceiling Mount Bracketfor ET_PKD310H for High Ceilings ET PKD310S for Low Ceilings Projectors Projector ceiling mount ET PAD310 bracket Projector Frame for ET PFD310 projectors Replacement lamp unit ET LAD310A 1 pc ET LAD310AW 2 pcs Replacement lamp unit for portrait mode Replacement Filter Unit ET EMF320 Smoke cut filter ET SFD320 Smoke cut filter Replacement Upgrade Kit ET UK20 only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE ET LAD320P 1 pc ET LAD320PW 2 pcs ET SFR320 Note The model numbers of optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice ENGLISH 21 Chapter 1 Preparation Start up display Start up display When the projector is switched on for the first time after purchase as well as when ALL USER DATA is executed from the PROJECTOR SETUP menu gt INITIALIZE the focus adjustment screen is displayed after projection starts then the INITIAL SETTING screen is displayed Set them according to the circumstances In other occasions you can change the settings by menu operations Adjust the focus to display the menu screen clearly You may also need to adjust the zoom and shift Refer to
130. MP1 REMAIN TIME LAMP2 REMAIN TIME The runtime of the lamp has exceeded the specified time and it is time to replace the lamp LAMP1 STATUS LAMP2 STATUS The lamp has failed to turn on Wait a while until the luminous lamp cools off and then turn on the power APERTURE CONTRAST SHUTTER There is a problem in the contrast shutter circuit for dynamic iris Consult your dealer INTAKE AIR TEMP SENSOR There is a problem with the sensor used to detect intake temperature Consult your dealer OPTICS MODULE TEMP SENSOR There is a problem with the sensor used to detect temperature inside the projector Consult your dealer AROUND LAMP TEMP SENSOR There is a problem with the sensor used to detect exhaust air temperature Consult your dealer BATTERY Battery replacement is required Consult your dealer LENS MOUNTER There is a problem in the lens mounter Consult your dealer COVER OPEN Installation of the lamp unit cover is incomplete Check the installation of the lamp unit cover page 164 BRIGHTNESS SENSOR There is a problem with the luminance sensor If problems persist even after switching on the power consult your dealer ANGLE SENSOR There is a problem with the sensor that detects angle Consult your dealer The air filter unit is not attached Check the connection of the air filter unit FILTER UNIT 9 page 160 AIR FILTE
131. Min Max Pragonal SD E SY wy an ow ery ow er ew er LW LT LW LT 1 78 70 0 872 1 550 2 07 2 77 2 80 4 21 4 23 7 09 7 10 11 37 11 09 21 14 1 39 1 66 2 03 80 0 996 1 771 2 38 3 18 3 21 4 83 4 84 8 13 8 13 13 01 12 73 24 21 1 60 1 91 2 29 90 1 121 1 992 2 68 3 59 3 62 545 546 9 16 9 16 14 65 14 37 27 29 1 81 2 16 2 54 100 1 245 2 214 2 99 4 00 4 04 6 07 6 08 10 19 10 19 16 29 16 01 30 36 2 01 241 3 05 120 1 494 2 657 3 60 4 82 4 86 7 30 7 31 12 25 12 26 19 57 19 29 36 50 243 2 90 3 81 150 1 868 3 321 4 53 6 05 6 09 9 15 9 16 15 34 15 35 2449 24 21 45 72 3 05 3 65 5 08 200 2 491 4 428 6 06 8 10 8 15 12 24 12 25 20 50 20 50 32 69 32 40 61 08 4 08 4 89 6 35 250 3 113 5 535 7 59 10 15 10 21 15 33 15 34 25 65 25 66 40 88 40 60 76 44 5 12 6 13 7 62 300 3 736 6 641 9 13 12 19 12 27 18 41 18 42 30 81 30 81 49 08 48 80 91 79 6 15 7 37 8 89 350 4 358 7 748 10 66 14 24 14 32 21 50 21 51 35 96 35 97 57 28 57 00 107 15 7 19 8 61 10 16 400 4 981 8 855 12 19 16 29 16 38 24 58 24 60 41 12 41 12 65 47 65 19 122 51 8 22 9 85 12 70 500 6 226 11 069 15 26 20 39 20 50 30 76 30 77 51 42 51 43 81 87 81 59 153 23 10 29 12 33 15 24 600 7 472 13 283 18 33 24 49
132. NETWORK VERSION 1 00 mem POWER REMOTE STATUS DISABLE 5 SHUITER OFF OSD ON Projector control LAMP SELECT SINGLE LAMP POWER MIDDLE INPUT VIDEO KHz H Detailed INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE setup OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE Change AROUND LAMP TEMPERATURE passivate LAMPI OFF RUNTIME EN LAMP2 ON RUNTIME RoomView PROJECTOR RUNTIME 60H SELF TEST No errors 140 ENGLISH Chapter 4 Settings NETWORK menu Note e f you use a web browser to control the projector set WEB CONTROL to ON in NETWORK CONTROL 9 page 137 Do not perform setting or control simultaneously by starting up multiple web browsers Do not set or control the projector from multiple computers e Change the password first page 153 e The administrator rights allow use of all functions The user rights allow use of Projector status page 142 confirmation of the error information page page 143 Network status page 144 Basic control amp page 145 and Change password page 153 only Access will be locked for few minutes when an incorrect password is entered three times consecutively e Some items on the projector setting page use the Javascript function of the web browser The projector may not be able to be controlled properly if it is set with a browser that does not have this function enabled e f the screen for the web control is not displayed consult your network administrator While updating the screen f
133. NITIALIZE Initial setting INPUT RESOLUTION Installation mode K KEYSTONE riais 84 L Lamp indicator LAMP POWER LAMP RELAY LAMP SELECT Lamp unit cover LARGE SCREEN C LEFT RIGHT SWAP LENS button Projector body see LENS CALIBRATION LENS MEMORY LIGHT button Remote control tacere creto List of compatible signals LOAD ALL USER DATA lt LOCK gt button Remote CONTON ossscsviessscsosssssooasssuveacensnsnssnesenssnassneeresens 24 M Main menu Main power switch Maintenance MENU button Projector body Remote contro Menu item N Navigating through the menu NETWORK Network connections NETWORK CONTROL 137 NETWORK SETUP NETWORK STATUS NOISE REDUCTION ini NO SIGNAL SHUT OFF seen 121 0 lt ON SCREEN gt button Remote control ON SCREEN DISP On screen menu Optional accessories P PICTURE PICTURE MODE P IN P P IN P function POSITION Power cord Power indicator Power on button Projector body Remote control Power standby button Projector body Remote control Precautions for Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors Precautions for use Projecting PROJECTION METHOD 109 Projector body PROJECTOR ID PROJECTOR SETUP Prot
134. NPUT MODE is set to ON 1 or 2 3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING cannot be set This may not function properly for some connected external devices Certain signals may not function properly SD INPUT FORMAT 0 O Set the 3D format for the image signals being input Set a 3D format that matches the input signal 1 Press A V to select 3D INPUT FORMAT 2 Press the ENTER button The 3D INPUT FORMAT screen is displayed 3 Press AY to select a 3D format AUTO Automatically detects 3D format of input image signals and displays images NATIVE Forcibly displays 2D images regardless of input image signals SIMULTANEOUS Forcibly displays 3D images in simultaneous system regardless of input video signals SIDE BY SIDE Forcibly displays 3D images in side by side format regardless of input image signals TOP AND BOTTOM Forcibly displays 3D images in top and bottom format regardless of input image signals LINE BY LINE Forcibly displays 3D images in line by line system regardless of input video signals FRAME SEQUENTIAL Forcibly displays 3D images in frame sequential format regardless of input image signals 1 During DVI D or HDMI input only 2 During 3G SDI level B input only 8 Only while signals other than interlaced signals are input 4 Only while progressive signals with the vertical scanning frequency of 100 Hz or 120 Hz are input to the lt RGB1 gt lt RGB2 gt lt D
135. ON menu SHUTTER SETTING Turn off the on screen display function no display when you do not wish the viewers to see the on screen display such as the menu or the input terminal name Ba button 1 Press the ON SCREEN button The on screen display disappears 2 Press the ON SCREEN button again The on screen display appears Note f you press the MENU button on the control panel for at least three seconds while the on screen display is off hidden the on screen display is turned on ENGLISH 61 Chapter3 Basic Operations Operating with the remote control Pm m The input for projection can be switched INPUT SELECT SIT button 1 Press the input selection lt RGB1 gt lt RGB2 gt lt DVI D gt VIDEO lt HDMI gt SDI 1 2 buttons This operation can be also performed using the buttons on the control panel lt RGB1 gt Switches the input to RGB1 lt RGB2 gt Switches the input to RGB2 lt DVI D gt Switches the input to DVI D lt VIDEO gt Switch the input to VIDEO lt HDMI gt Switch the input to HDMI PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE Switches the input to SDI1 or SDI2 Switches to another input when one input has already been chosen You can also fix the input selection to either SDI1 or SDI2 from the SECURITY menu gt CONTROL DEVICE SETUP PT DZ10KE Switches the input to SDI SDI 1 2 gt 1 1 Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE
136. P 400001 Y C Chapter 6 Appendix Technical information E Lens control command Command Sub command Details Remark VXX LNSI2 Lens H shift VXX LNSI3 Lens V shift 00000 Fine adjustment 1 00001 Fine adjustment 1 00100 Fine adjustment 2 00101 Fine adjustment 2 00200 Coarse adjustment 00201 Coarse adjustment VXX LNSIA Lens focus VXX LNSI5 Lens zoom It is possible to control the projector remotely by external contact from a control panel located away from the projector where remote control signals cannot reach Use the lt REMOTE 2 IN terminal on the connecting terminals of the projector to connect to the control panel Remote control lr Contact control Remote control contact control Standby Lit Lamp Installation locations in meeting rooms etc Remote control board in another location Pin assignments and signal names Poire qud Pin No Signal name Open H Short L 1 GND GND 2 POWER OFF ON 5 1 3 RGB1 Other RGB1 x 4 RGB2 Other RGB2 TI 5 VIDEO Other VIDEO O pees e 6 HDMI Other HDMI ES 7 DVI D Other DVI D 9 6 8 SHUTTER OFF ON 9 RST SET Controlled by remote Controlled by external control contact Attention When controlling make sure to short circuit pins 1 and 9 When pins 1 and 9 are short circuited the following
137. Panasonic Operating Instructions Functional Manual DLP Projector vaino PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE PT DZ10KE The projection lens is sold separately Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product m The Operating Instructions correspond to the firmware s main version 4 04 and higher m Before operating this product please read the instructions carefully and save this manual for future use m Before using your projector be sure to read Read this first pages 2 to 9 reaL D 3D ENGLISH TQBJ0522 3 Read this first Read this first WARNING THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED WARNING To prevent damage which may result in fire or shock hazard do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture This device is not intended for use in the direct field of view at visual display workplaces To avoid incommoding reflexions at visual display workplaces this device must not be placed in the direct field of view The equipment is not intended for used at a video workstation in compliance BildscharbV The sound pressure level at the operator position is equal or less than 70 dB A according to ISO 7779 WARNING 1 Remove the plug from the mains socket when this unit is not in use for a prolonged period of time 2 To prevent electric shock do not remove cover No user serviceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified service personnel 3 Do not remove the earthing pin on t
138. Press the ENTER button The set MODE and LINK are enabled and LAMP RELAY screen alert is displayed when the LAMP RELAY setting is OFF When CALIBRATION MESSAGE is set to ON a calibration running message is displayed which will automatically disappear 30 seconds after calibration completes e f the ENTER button is pressed with MODE in BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP set to other than OFF the brightness of the lamp at the time the button was pressed is recorded as the standard brightness e f the ENTER button is pressed when LINK is set from GROUP A to GROUP D the group name is displayed on the screens of projectors that have been set in the same group LINK GROUP A ENGLISH 113 Chapter4 Settings PROJECTOR SETUP menu Note When MODE in BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP is set to AUTO or PC keep the shutter open for at least two minutes to perform the brightness sensor calibration after completed the BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP setting e f the shutter is closed within approx 10 minutes after the lamp has turned on while MODE in BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP is set to AUTO or PC brightness cannot be measured Therefore brightness may be corrected approx two minutes after the shutter opens When MODE in BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP is set to AUTO or PC the lamp brightness is automatically measured eight minutes after the lamp is turned on and correction is performed so that the screen b
139. R There is too much dust accumulated in the air filter unit Turn the lt MAIN POWER gt switch OFF page 55 and clean the air filter page 160 AC POWER AC input voltage is weak Use electric wiring that can sufficiently withstand the power consumption of the projector ENGLISH 143 Chapter 4 Settings NETWORK menu Network status page Click Status Network status The current network setting status is displayed Projector Control Window Projector status Network status DHCP Status SUBNET MASK j 24 Ss 00 40 63 00 01 2 Projector MAC ADDRESS 00 40 63 00 01 21 control Detailed set up Change password CRESTRON RoomView Hai Access error log page Click Status Access error log Access error log Access log IP ADDRESS 192 168 0 8 DEFAULT GATEWAY RX TX Packets info The error log on the web server is displayed such as access to the pages that do not exist or access with unauthorized user names or passwords Projector Control Window Projector status Network status NEM Projector control Detailed setup Change password CRESTRON RoomView Bam Access error log Access log Web server error log Access log page Click Status Access log The log such as user name accessed to the WEB control page accessed IP address accessed time is displayed O l Sa A o Projector Control Window
140. S MESSAGE 95 3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ss 95 DISPLAY OPTION menu 96 COLOR MATCHING 96 LARGE SCREEN CORRECTION 97 SCREEN SETTING tette 97 AUTO SIGNAL tires 98 AUTO SETUP reto eee dm 98 BACKUP INPUT SET T ING 99 RGB IN ttt tt tette teet tette 100 DVI D IN 101 HDMI IN 101 SONN inerea eren eee inet 101 ON SCREEN DISPLAY 103 BACK COLOR 104 STARTUP EOGDO oretenus 105 UNIFORMITY cist ctt tiet het etit 105 SHUTTER SETTING 106 FREEZE ette pedet eedem 106 WAVEFORM MONITOR sss 106 CUT OFF icto intct tene dde 108 PROJECTOR SETUP menu 109 PROJECTOR ID 109 PROJECTION METHOD sss 109 COOLING CONDITION 110 HIGH ALTITUDE MODE 110 LAMP SELECT itn ter Ee es 110 LAMP RELAY n ttr teo tete eina 111 LAMP POWER 112 BRIGHTNESS CONTROL sss 112 STANDBY MODE sse 116 SCHEDULE sss 117 STARTUP INPUT SELECT 118 RS 232C aees ettet e peti there deri 119 STATUS tette tret taper 120 NO SIGNAL SHU OFF 121 REMOTE2 MODPBE t rrr rete 122 FUNCTION BUTTON cette 122 DATE AND TIME 122 LENS CALIBRATION sese 123 LENS MEMORY 123 SAVE ALL USER DATA 125 LOAD ALL USER DATA 125 INITIAEIZE ees 125 SERVICE PASSWORD sss 126 P IN P menu neto rhe tede 127 Using P IN P function 127 TEST PATTERN menu 129 TEST PATTERN 129 SIGNAL LIST menu
141. SUB MEMORY TOR SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW TEST PATTERN GETOSD Control of the projector The projector is controlled by clicking the buttons in the same way as the buttons on the remote control After control the on screen display of the projector at the right of the control page is updated On screen display of the projector Displays the same items as shown on the on screen display of the projector You can check or change the settings of the menus It is displayed even if the on screen display function is set to off hide SUB MEMORY 8 WAVEFORM MONITOR Switches the sub memory Displays the waveform of the input signal SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW 9 LENS Switches to system daylight view settings Adjusts the projection lens FREEZE 10 TEST PATTERN Temporarily pauses the image Displays the test pattern P IN P 11 GET OSD Switches the P IN P setting LEFT RIGHT SWAP only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE Switches the flip horizontal settings Updates the on screen display of the projector at the right of the control page ENGLISH 145 Chapter 4 Settings NETWORK menu Network config page Click Detailed set up Network config Click Network config to display the CAUTION screen The current settings are displayed by pressing the Next button Click Change to display the setting change
142. Select the lamp to be turned on from the two built in luminous lamps according to the use conditions or purposes 1 Press A V to select LAMP SELECT 2 Press 4b to switch the item DUAL Two lamps will light SINGLE One lamp will light The lamp with shorter runtime will automatically light LAMP 1 Lamp 1 will light LAMP2 Lamp 2 will light 110 ENGLISH Chapter4 Settings PROJECTOR SETUP menu 3 Press the ENTER button Note For a certain time after LAMP SELECT is switched LAMP SELECT cannot be switched again because the speed of the lamp replacement cycle will increase Repeatedly switching LAMP SELECT in a short time will also increase the speed of the lamp replacement cycle The colors of the items indicate the status Green Current setting Yellow Current setting when there is a lamp that cannot turn on or failed to turn on Red Lamp that has failed to turn on White Any other status e When a lamp cannot turn on or the runtime exceeds 2 500 hours 2 the lamp is turned off and the other lamp is turned on The projector enters standby mode when the runtime of both lamps exceeds 2 500 hours 1 2 1 500 hours when using the optional Replacement lamp unit for portrait mode Model No ET LAD320P 1 pc ET LAD320PW 2 pcs 2 3500 hours for PT DZ10KE Ensure that lamp units not to be turned on are also installed More lamps than the spec
143. The projector does not support VIERA Link HDMI ENGLISH 49 Chapter 2 Getting Started Connecting For SDI IN 12 SDI IN 2 terminals PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE SDI IN terminal PT DZ10KE The connection example is for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE Digital VCR for commercial use BeBe da a poo SD SDI signal HD SDI signal or 3G SDI signal Note Use the PICTURE menu SYSTEM SELECTOR to switch the input format e Some external devices to be connected require the DISPLAY OPTION menu gt SDI IN to be set Use a 5CFB or higher such as 5CFB or 7CFB or a Belden 1694A or higher connection cable to properly transmit images Use a connection cable of 100 m 328 1 length or less To enter dual link signals the SDI LINK in SDI IN must be set Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE Use the same length and same type of cables to connect lt SDI IN 1 gt lt SDI IN 2 terminals when entering dual link signals If there is a difference of 4 m 13 1 or greater in cable length images may not be projected properly Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE To input dual link signals connect directly without going through a distributor or other such device to the external device which outputs signals A phase difference may occur between the LINK A signal and the LINK B signal and images may not be projected properly Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE When an unsteady signal is connected an error in signal dete
144. Use the projection lens Model No ET D75LE5 ET D75LE50 with the lens position set to the home position page 57 The adjustment can be performed faster by pressing and holding A Y 4P while adjusting the focus and shift It is recommended that images be projected continuously for at least 30 minutes before the focus is adjusted Only FOCUS is shown in yellow so that the displayed menu item can be recognized by color even when the projector is not focused and displayed characters are unreadable Factory default The display color of FOCUS depends on the setting of the DISPLAY OPTION menu ON SCREEN DISPLAY gt OSD DESIGN When the power is switched off during focus and shift adjustment lens calibration needs to be performed the next time the power is switched on page 123 When the main power is switched off during focus adjustment lens calibration is performed automatically during the next focus adjustment When the main power is switched off during shift adjustment a lens calibration error screen will be displayed during the next shift adjustment Execute the PROJECTOR SETUP menu LENS CALIBRATION When the lens calibration error is displayed even though LENS CALIBRATION was executed ask your dealer to repair the unit 56 ENGLISH Chapter 3 Basic Operations Projecting Moving the he M To move the lens to the home position perform the following procedure 1 While the SHIFT adjustmen
145. VI D gt terminals 92 ENGLISH Chapter4 Settings 3D SETTINGS menu 4 Press the ENTER button Note When set to AUTO SIMULTANEOUS SIDE BY SIDE TOP AND BOTTOM LINE BY LINE or FRAME SEQUENTIAL 3D images are not displayed in 3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING In AUTO however this only occurs when 3D format can be recognized This may not function properly for some connected external devices LEFT RIGHT SWAP Display images by inverting the timing of horizontal image switching Change the settings when there is something wrong with the 3D image being viewed 1 Press A V to select LEFT RIGHT SWAP 2 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button NORMAL Do not change the NORMAL setting if the 3D images are displayed correctly SWAPPED Select this when left and right 3D images are swapped to be displayed Note This is disabled when 3D SYSTEM SETTING is set to other than SINGLE 8D COLOR MATCHING gt 2 v Switches the color matching correction data applied to the displayed image 1 Press AY to select 3D COLOR MATCHING 2 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button SHARED 2D 3D 2D signals and 3D signals use the same correction data SEPARATE 2D 3D 2D signals and 3D signals use different correction data Note Switch the setting of COLOR MATCHING 9 page 96
146. Y and press lt gt to set the amount of delay output 0us 25 000 us Allows you to set in increments of 10 us To synchronize multiple projectors to display 3D images use a frame synch input and output Select 9 or 10 for the first projector Select 6 7 or 8 for the second and subsequent projectors Stereo synchronization is a signal having a 50 duty cycle where High is for the left eye and Low is for the right eye e H is output to the 3D image display and L is output to the 2D image display from the terminal for which 3D trigger output is selected Note e 11 or 3D SYNC MODE is the setting when the 3D IR TRANSMITTER TY 3DTRW of Panasonic is used with the projector Consult your dealer regarding the connection method Set this item to input and use 3D video signals of the simultaneous system 1 Press A V to select 3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING 2 Press the ENTER button The 3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select LEFT RGB1 RIGHT RGB2 LEFT HDMI RIGHT DVI D or LEFT SDI1 RIGHT SDI2 only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE 4 Press 4b to switch the setting OFF Cannot use 3D simultaneous AUTO Displays 3D images of the simultaneous system Note When set to AUTO 3D images are displayed when the same 3D compatible signals are entered to each input However the P IN P status during P IN P is maintained When BACKUP I
147. ZZZZ CR example ASCII string 0x20 0x31 0x20 ASCII code hex number Ox0d Data length 9 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 8 bytes 1 byte Mode 1 Protect mode 3 Generate a 32 byte hash value from the following data using MD5 algorithm XXXXXX YYYYY ZZZZZZZZ XXXXXX Administrator rights user name for the web control default user name is admin1 yyyyy Password of above administrator rights user default password is panasonic ZZZZZZZz 8 byte random number obtained in Step 2 Command transmission method Transmit using the following command formats B Transmitted data Header Data section Termination symbol Command Hash value 0 0 Control command CR example Refer to Connecting above 0x30 0x30 ASCII string Ox0d Data length 32 bytes 1 byte 1 byte Undefined length 1 byte ENGLISH 171 Chapter 6 Appendix Technical information E Received data Header Data section Termination symbol Command 0 0 Control command CR example 0x30 0x30 ASCII string Ox0d Data length 1 byte 1 byte Undefined length 1 byte B Error response String Details Termination symbol ERR1 Undefined control command ERR2 Out of parameter range ERR3 Busy state or no acceptable period CR Message ERR4 Timeout or no acceptable period Ox0d ERR5 Wrong data length ERRA Password mismatch Data length 4 bytes 1 byte
148. abled when SINGLE or DUAL is selected in LAMP SELECT When DUAL is selected in LAMP SELECT only one lamp will light for four hours from the specified time e The operating time will be the local time page 122 ENGLISH 111 Chapter4 Settings PROJECTOR SETUP menu ILAMPPOWER 1 1 Switch the brightness of the lamp according to the operating environment of the projector or the purpose 1 Press A V to select LAMP POWER 2 Press 4b to switch the item HIGH Select when high luminance is required MIDDLET Select when using the projector with slightly reduced luminance compared to HI GH NORMAL Select when high luminance is required ECO Select when high luminance is not required 1 Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE 2 Onlyfor PT DZ10KE Note HIGH cannot be selected when the optional Replacement lamp unit for portrait mode Model No ET LAD320P 1 pc ET LAD320PW 2 pcs is used Even when HIGH is selected while the normal lamp unit is used the setting is switched to MIDDLE automatically if the optional Replacement lamp unit for portrait mode is used You can reduce power consumption and operation noise and extend the life of the lamps by setting to MIDDLE rather than HIGH or by setting to ECO rather than MIDDLE or NORMAL BRIGHTNESS CONTROL 1 The projector is equipped with a luminance sensor to measure brightness and functions to corre
149. ach time you press the button OFF Decreases the flickering of the display ON Synchronizes the display to the vertical scanning frequency of the input signal Note FRAME LOCK is not displayed when the vertical scanning frequency of a signal other than the above is input or 2D images are displayed The screen may flicker when FRAME LOCK is set to ON The display may look discontinuous when FRAME LOCK is set to OFF RASTERPOSITION 1 1 This will allow the position of the image to move within the display area arbitrarily when the input image is not using the whole display area 1 Press A V to select RASTER POSITION 2 Press the ENTER button The RASTER POSITION screen is displayed 3 Press A W 4b to adjust the position ENGLISH 89 Chapter 4 Settings DISPLAY LANGUAGE menu DISPLAY LANGUAGE menu On the menu screen select DISPLAY LANGUAGE from the main menu and display the sub menu Refer to Navigating through the menu page 65 for the operation of the menu screen e Press A to select a language and press the ENTER button to set You can select the language of the on screen display INITIAL SETTING ENGLISH Various menus settings adjustment screens control button names etc are displayed in the selected language The language can be changed to English German French Spanish Italian Portuguese Japanese
150. aler for correct methods of disposal The lamp contains mercury When disposing of used lamp units contact your local authorities or dealer for correct methods of disposal E To get a good picture quality In order to view a beautiful image in higher contrast prepare an appropriate environment Draw curtains or blinds over windows and turn off any lights near the screen to prevent outside light or light from indoor lamps from shining onto the screen 18 ENGLISH Chapter 1 Preparation Precautions for use E Do not touch the surface of the projection lens with your bare hands If the surface of the projection lens becomes dirty from fingerprints or anything else this will be magnified and projected onto the screen Attach the supplied lens cover to the projection lens when you do not use the projector B DLP chips The DLP chips are precision made Note that in rare cases pixels of high precision could be missing or always lit Note that such phenomena does not indicate malfunction Directing a high power laser beam onto the lens surface can damage the DLP chips E Do not move the projector or subject it to vibration or impact while it is operating Doing so may shorten the life of the built in motor E Lamp The light source of the projector is a high pressure mercury lamp A high pressure mercury lamp has the following characteristics The luminance of the lamp will decrease by duration of usage The lamp may bur
151. als and displays the image by AUTO automatically switching the screen sizes between 4 3 and 16 9 This function is effective for 480i 480p signals THROUGH Displays images without changing the resolution of the input signals 16 9 Displays images with the aspect ratio converted to 16 9 when standard signals are input Display images without changing the aspect ratio when wide screen signals are input Displays images without changing the aspect ratio when standard signals are input s Displays images 4 3 without changing the aspect ratio so that the images will fit in the 4 3 screen when wide screen signals are input Displays images using the entire width of the screen When signals have the aspect ratio vertically H FIT longer than the aspect ratio of the screen selected in SCREEN FORMAT the images are displayed with the top and bottom parts cut off Displays images using the entire height of the screen range selected in SCREEN FORMAT When V FIT signals have the aspect ratio horizontally longer than the aspect ratio of the screen selected in SCREEN FORMAT the images are displayed with the right and left parts cut off Displays images in the entire screen range selected in SCREEN FORMAT When the aspect ratio of HV FIT the input signals differs from that of the screen range the images are displayed with the aspect ratio converted to that of the screen selected in SCREEN FORMAT 1 F
152. amp indicator lt LAMP1 gt Tem PR Displays the status of lamp 1 3 Lamp indicator lt LAMP2 gt T9 Displays the status of lamp 2 IF 4 Temperature indicator lt TEMP gt Displays the internal temperature status 5 Filter indicator lt FILTER gt Displays the status of the air filter unit O Q 6 Adjustable feet Adjusts the projection angle e Projection direction 7 Remote control signal receiver front Air exhaust port 9 Lampunit cover 10 Remote control signal receiver rear 11 Control panel page 26 12 Connecting terminals page 27 ENGLISH 25 Chapter 1 Preparation About your projector 13 Security slot This security slot is compatible with the Kensington security cables 14 Air intake port 15 ACIN terminal Connect the supplied power cord Attention Do not block the ventilation ports intake and exhaust of the projector E Control panel POWER ONNSTANDBY 16 17 18 MAIN POWER switch Turns on off the main power Air filter cover The air filter unit is inside Burglar hook port Attaches a burglar prevention cable etc on O an Q 1 Power standby lt b gt button Sets the projector to the state where the projector is switched off standby mode when the MAIN POWER switch on the projector is set to ON and in projection mode 2 Power on button Starts projection when the MA
153. and press q gt to change the setting WEB CONTROL Set to ON to control with the web browser PJLink CONTROL Set to ON to control with the PJLink protocol COMMAND CONTROL Set to ON to control with the SERIAL IN gt lt SERIAL OUT gt terminal control command format page 176 Refer to Control commands via LAN page 171 COMMAND PORT Set the port number used for command control CRESTRON RoomView Set to ON to control with RoomView of Crestron Electronics Inc Set to ON to control with the controller of AMX Corporation Setting this function to ON enables detection through AMX Device Discovery For details refer to FAGES Deh the website of AMX Corporation URL http www amx com STORE Save the current network control settings ENGLISH 137 Chapter 4 Settings NETWORK menu 4 Press A V to select STORE and press the ENTER button 5 When the confirmation screen is displayed press 4P to select OK and press the ENTER button NETWORK STATUS 1 1 Display the status of the projector network 1 Press A V to select NETWORK STATUS 2 Press the ENTER button The NETWORK STATUS screen is displayed Make settings to use the Art Net function 1 Press A V to select Art Net SETUP 2 Press 4b to select an item The items will switch each time you press the button OFF Disables the Art N
154. ansport or store Remove the projection lens using the following procedure Lock button 1 Remove the lens fixing screw Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the first screw to the right of the projection lens mark orange 2 While pressing the lock button turn the projection lens counterclockwise to remove Turn counterclockwise until the projection lens mark orange is at the mark on the projector body O to the left of LOCK Note e Some lenses may not have a screw hole to use to secure the projection lens 46 ENGLISH Chapter2 Getting Started Attaching removing the projection lens optional Attention Store the removed projection lens where it will be free from vibration and impact Store the removed lens fixing screw in a safe place ENGLISH 47 Chapter 2 Getting Started Connecting Connecting Before connecting 7 Before connecting carefully read the operating instructions for the external device to be connected Turn off the power of all devices before connecting cables Take note of the following points before connecting the cables Failure to do so may result in malfunctions When connecting a cable to a device connected to the projector or the projector itself touch any nearby metallic objects to eliminate static electricity from your body before performing work Do not use unnecessarily long cables to connect to a device conn
155. ase the operating environment temperature to 0 C 32 F or higher turn off the main power and then switch on the projector again e f the PROJECTOR SETUP menu STANDBY MODE is set to ECO it may take approx 10 seconds longer before the projector starts projecting after the power is turned on compared with when NORMAL is set e f the MAIN POWER switch was set to OFF during projection to end the projection using the direct power off function last time and the MAIN POWER switch is set to ON with the power plug connected to the outlet the power indicator ON G STANDBY R gt will light in green and the image will soon be projected on the screen ENGLISH 53 Chapter 3 Basic Operations Switching on off the projector It is recommended that images are projected continuously for at least 30 minutes before the focus is adjusted POWER ON STANDBY A D 2 qut j voo i i Rest 1 Press the FOCUS button to roughly adjust the focus of the image gt page 56 2 Change the settings of the PROJECTOR SETUP menu PROJECTION METHOD and COOLING CONDITION depending on the installation mode page 31 e Refer to Navigating through the menu page 65 for the operation of the menu screen 3
156. ate or result in fire e Take particular care in locations exposed to direct sunlight or near stoves Do not place your hands in the openings beside the optical lens while shifting the lens Failure to observe this could cause injury Do not stand in front of the lens while the projector is being used Doing so can cause damage and burns to clothing e Extremely strong light is emitted from the projector s lens Do not place objects in front of the lens while the projector is being used Doing so can cause damage to the object and can cause the set to malfunction e Extremely strong light is emitted from the projector s lens Always disconnect all cables before moving the projector Moving the projector with cables still attached can damage the cables which will cause fire or electric shocks to occur When mounting the projector on the ceiling keep mounting screws and power cord from contact with metal parts inside the ceiling Contact with metal parts inside the ceiling can cause electric shocks B ACCESSORIES Do not use the old lamp unit If used it could cause lamp explosion If the lamp has broken ventilate the room immediately Do not touch or bring your face close to the broken pieces Failure to observe this will cause the user to absorb the gas which was released when the lamp broke and which contains nearly the same amount of mercury as fluorescent lamps and the broken pieces will cause injury e f you believe that you
157. ay or removed If the battery fluid leaks do not touch it with bare hands and take the following measures if necessary e Battery fluid on your skin or clothing could result in skin inflammation or injury Rinse with clean water and seek medical advice immediately e Battery fluid coming in contact with your eyes could result in loss of sight In this case do not rub your eyes Rinse with clean water and seek medical advice immediately Do not remove unspecified screws during the lamp unit replacement Doing so can cause electric shocks burns or injury Do not disassemble the lamp unit If the lamp breaks it could cause injury Lamp replacement The lamp has high internal pressure If improperly handled an explosion and severe injury or accidents will result e The lamp can easily explode if struck against hard objects or dropped e Before replacing the lamp unit be sure to turn the power off and to disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet Electric shocks or explosions can result if this is not done e When replacing the lamp unit turn the power off and allow the lamp to cool for at least one hour before handling it otherwise it can cause burns Do not use the supplied power cord with devices other than this projector e Using the supplied power cord with devices other than this projector may cause short circuits or overheating and result in electric shock or fire Keep accessories screws out of the reach of small children
158. ay the status of the projector 1 Press A V to select STATUS 2 Press the ENTER button The STATUS screen is displayed 3 Press 4b to switch the pages The page will change each time you press the button INPUT Displays the input terminal currently selected BACKUP INPUT STATUS Displays whether switching to the backup input signal is possible or not when BACKUP INPUT MODE is set to ON 1 or 2 amp page 99 SIGNAL NAME Displays the input signal name SIGNAL FREQUENCY Displays the frequency of the input signal PROJECTOR RUNTIME Displays the operation times of the projector LAMP1 Displays the runtime and status of Lamp 1 LAMP2 Displays the runtime and status of Lamp 2 INTAKE AIR TEMP Displays the status of the air intake temperature of the projector OPTICS MODULE TEMP Displays the status of the internal temperature of the projector AROUND LAMP TEMP Displays the status of the temperature around the lamps of the projector PROJECTOR TYPE Displays the type of the projector SERIAL NUMBER Displays the serial number of the projector LAMP UNIT MODEL NO Displays the model no of the lamp unit LAMP1 SERIAL NUMBER Displays the serial number of the lamp 1 120 LAMP2 SERIAL NUMBER Displays the serial number of the lamp 2 MAIN VERSION Displays the main version of the firmware of the proj
159. b menu items and factory default settings differ depending on the selected input terminal DISPLAY LANGUAGE IZ Details page 90 3D SETTINGS Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE Sub menu item Factory default Page 3D SYSTEM SETTING SINGLE 91 3D SYNC SETTING 91 3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING 92 3D INPUT FORMAT AUTOT 92 LEFT RIGHT SWAP NORMAL 93 3D COLOR MATCHING SHARED 2D 3D 93 3D PICTURE BALANCE 93 DARK TIME SETTING 1 5 ms 94 3D FRAME DELAY Ous 94 3D TEST MODE NORMAL 94 3D TEST PATTERN 95 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MESSAGE ON 95 3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 95 1 Depends on the selected input terminal DISPLAY OPTION Ce Sub menu item Factory default Page COLOR MATCHING OFF 96 LARGE SCREEN CORRECTION OFF 97 SCREEN SETTING 97 AUTO SIGNAL OFF 98 AUTO SETUP 98 BACKUP INPUT SETTING 99 RGB IN 100 DVI D IN 101 HDMI IN 101 SDI IN 101 ON SCREEN DISPLAY 103 BACK COLOR BLUE 104 STARTUP LOGO DEFAULT LOGO 105 UNIFORMITY 105 SHUTTER SETTING 106 FREEZE 106 WAVEFORM MONITOR OFF 106 CUT OFF 108 1 Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DZ10KE 68 ENGLISH Chapter 4 Settings Menu navigation PROJECTOR SETUP amp Sub menu item Factory default Page PROJECTOR ID ALL 109 PROJECTION MET
160. become sharper 0 445 Press the 4 button Contours become softer ENGLISH 75 Chapter4 Settings PICTURE menu Note f you press gt while the adjustment value is 15 the value will become 0 If you press while the adjustment value is 0 the value will become 15 NOISE REDUCTION 00 You can reduce noises when the input image is degraded and noise is occurring in the image signal 1 Press A V to select NOISE REDUCTION 2 Press 4b or the ENTER button The NOISE REDUCTION individual adjustment screen is displayed 3 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button OFF No correction 1 Slightly corrects the noise 2 Moderately corrects the noise 3 Strongly corrects the noise Attention When this is set for an input signal with less noise the image may look different from what it originally was In such a case set it to OFF DYNAMIC IRIS Aperture correction and signal compensation are performed automatically based on the image to result in an image of optimum contrast 1 Press A V to select DYNAMIC IRIS 2 Press 4b or the ENTER button The DYNAMIC IRIS individual adjustment screen is displayed 3 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button OFF No correction 1 Slightly corrects aperture and compensate signals 2 Modera
161. bles are non specific characters Command Control details Parameter return string Remark 0 Standby POWR Power supply control 1 Power on 0 Standby 1 Power on POWR Power supply status uu l query 2 Preparing for switching off the projector 3 Warm up 11 RGB1 INPT Input selection 12 RGB2 21 VIDEO 31 DVI D 32 HDMI INPT Input selection query 33 SDI1 only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE SDI only for PT DZ10KE 34 SDI2 only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE AVMT Shutter control 30 Shutter function off shutter open AVMT Shutter status query 31 Shutter function on shutter closed 1st byte Indicates fan errors and returns e 0 No error is y 0 2 detected Indicates lamp errors and returns 1 Warning 2nd byte 0 2 e 2 Error 3rd byte Indicates temperature errors and returns 0 2 ERST Error status query XXXXXX Indicates cover open errors and 4th byte returns 0 or 2 5th byte Indicates filter errors and returns 0 2 6th byte Indicates other errors and returns 0 2 1st digits 1 5 digits Lamp 1 runtime 2nd digit 0 Lamp 1 off 1 Lamp 1 on LAMP Lamp status query XXXXXXXXXXXX 3rd digits 1 5 digits Lamp 2 runtime Ath digit 0 Lamp 2 off 1 Lamp 2 on 11 12 21 31 32 33 34 Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE INST Input selection list query 11 12 21 31 32 Only for PT DW11KE 11 12 21 31 32 33 Only for PT DZ10KE NAME Projector name query Returns th
162. button on the remote control is pressed the values adjusted in the menu items are restored to the factory default settings button 1 Press the DEFAULT button on the remote control CONTRAST EE E gt lt gt ADJUST Note You cannot reset all the settings to the factory default at a time e To reset all the settings adjusted in the sub menu item to the factory default one at a time execute PROJECTOR SETUP menu gt INITIALIZE page 125 e Some items cannot be reset by pressing the DEFAULT button Adjust each item manually The triangular mark under the bar scale in the individual adjustment screen indicates the factory default setting The position of the triangular mark varies according to the selected input signals Current adjustment value Factory default setting The following items are in the main menu When a main menu item is selected the screen changes to a sub menu selection screen Main menu item Page 3 PICTURE 71 IE POSITION 79 ADVANCED MENU 85 DISPLAY LANGUAGE 90 e 3D SETTINGS 91 Ce DISPLAY OPTION 96 66 ENGLISH Chapter 4 Settings Menu navigation 1 Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE Main menu item Page amp PROJECTOR SETUP 109 d P IN P 127 wg TEST PATTERN 129 E SIGNAL LIST 130 d SECURITY 133 z S NETWORK 137 Submenu 0 The sub menu of the selected main menu
163. ch the SIGNAL LEVEL item The items will switch each time you press the button AUTO Automatically sets the signal level Select when the HDMI terminal of an external device such as a blu ray disc player is connected to the HDMI IN terminal Select when the DVI D terminal output of an external device such as a computer is connected to the HDMI IN terminal via a conversion cable or similar cable Select also when the HDMI terminal output of a computer or other device is connected to the HDMI IN terminal 64 940 0 1023 Note The optimal setting varies depending on the output setting of the connected external device Refer to the operating instructions of the external device regarding the output of the external device The HDMI signal level is displayed for every 30 bits of input SDIIN J 0 Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DZ10KE Set to match the signal to input to the lt SDI IN 1 gt lt SDI IN 2 terminals PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE or SDI IN terminal PT DZ10KE ENGLISH 101 Chapter 4 Settings DISPLAY OPTION menu Setting SDI LINK Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE 1 2 3 4 Press AY to select SDI IN Press the ENTER button The SDI IN screen is displayed Press A V to select SDI LINK Press 4P to switch the item SINGLE LINK Sets SDI1 input and SDI2 input to single link DUAL LINK Sets SDI1 input and SDI2 inp
164. cover screw e Perform Step 2 in Removing the air filter unit page 160 in the reverse order Attention After washing the air filter unit dry it thoroughly before attaching it back to the projector Attaching a wet unit will cause an electric shock or malfunction Do not disassemble the air filter unit Note Make sure that the air filter unit is properly attached before using the projector If it is not properly attached the projector will suck in dirt and dust causing a malfunction e f you use the projector without attaching the air filter unit the filter indicator FILTER flashes in red and the message appears on the projection screen for approximately 30 seconds Replace the air filter unit with the new optional Replacement Filter Unit Model No ET EMF320 if it is damaged or if the dirt does not come off even after washing Air filter replacement is recommended after cleaning the unit two times The dust proof properties may be reduced after each cleaning ENGLISH 161 Chapter 5 Maintenance Maintenance replacement Air filter unit If dirt does not come off even after the unit is maintained it is time for the unit to be replaced The Replacement Filter Unit Model No ET EMF320 is an optional accessory To purchase the product consult your dealer Replacing the air filter unit Attention Make sure to turn off the power before replacing the air filter unit When attaching the unit make
165. creen is displayed 5 Press A V to select USER1 or USER2 The status of the color temperature changed is saved to the selected item 6 Press the ENTER button The confirmation screen is displayed 7 Press 4b to select OK and press the ENTER button The USER1 or USER2 data is overwritten f you press 4P to select CANCEL and then press the ENTER button the data will not be overwritten The WHITE BALANCE HIGH screen is displayed 8 Press A V to select RED GREEN or BLUE 9 Press 4b to adjust the level Note Adjust COLOR TEMPERATURE correctly All colors will not be displayed properly unless adequate adjustment is made If the adjustment does not look suitable you can press the DEFAULT button on the remote control to return the setting for the selected item only to the factory default setting When color temperature has been changed the colors before and after the change will differ slightly Changing the name of USER1 or USER2 1 Press A V to select COLOR TEMPERATURE 2 Press 4b or the ENTER button The COLOR TEMPERATURE individual adjustment screen is displayed 3 Press q gt to select USER1 or USER2 4 Press the ENTER button The COLOR TEMPERATURE screen is displayed 5 Press A V to select COLOR TEMPERATURE NAME CHANGE 6 Press the ENTER button The COLOR TEMPERATURE NAME CHANGE screen is displayed 7 Press A V 4b to select the text and press th
166. creen to project two images simultaneously 1 Press A V to select P IN P MODE 2 Press the lt ENTER gt button The P IN P MODE screen is displayed 3 Press AY to select a function OFF P IN P function is not used USER1 USER2 The items set in Setting P IN P function page 127 are used in P IN P function USER3 4 Press the ENTER button Setting P IN P function P IN P function settings can be saved to USER1 USER2 and USERS 1 Press A V to select P IN P MODE 2 Press the ENTER button The P IN P MODE screen is displayed 3 Press AY to select the desired mode from USER1 USER2 and USER3 and press the ENTER button 4 Press A V to select MAIN WINDOW or SUB WINDOW and press the ENTER button 5 Press A V to select the input terminal to be displayed in the window and press the ENTER button 6 Press A Vto select an item SIZE Set the window display size between 10 and 100 POSITION Set the display position of the window within the screen When the sub window is input from the RGB 1 IN terminal or the RGB 2 IN terminal and a flickering image or smeared outline appears set between 0 and 31 CLOCK PHASE 7 If SIZE is selected in Step 6 press the ENTER button The sub menu is displayed 8 Press A Vto select an item 9 Press q gt to make adjustment and press the MENU button 10 If POS
167. ct a cooling condition When AUTO is selected the cooling conditions of FLOOR SETTING CEILING SETTING VERTICAL UP SETTING and VERTICAL DOWN SETTING are set automatically You can check the setting from COOLING CONDITION on the STATUS screen 4 Press the ENTER button 5 When the confirmation screen is displayed press 4P to select OK and press the ENTER button Note This item cannot be set when using the optional Replacement lamp unit for portrait mode Model No ET LAD320P 1 pc ET LAD320PW 2 pcs Setting is fixed to PORTRAIT SETTING HIGH ALTITUDE MODE 4 Set to ON when using the projector at high altitudes between 1 400 m 4 593 or higher and lower than 2 700 m 8 858 above sea level 1 Press A V to select HIGH ALTITUDE MODE 2 Press 4b to switch the item OFF When using at a location lower than 1 400 m 4 593 above sea level ON When using at high altitudes 1 400 m 4 593 or higher and lower than 2 700 m 8 858 above sea level 3 When the confirmation screen is displayed press 4P to select OK and press the ENTER button Note The speed of the fan increases and the operation sound becomes louder when set to ON This item cannot be set when using the optional Smoke cut filter Model No ET SFD320 Setting is fixed to OFF Use it at elevations lower than 1 400 m 4 593 above sea level LAMP SELECT 11
168. ct screen brightness resulting from changes in lamp brightness Use the projector when using multiple projectors to display on multiple screens to reduce changes in overall brightness of the multiple screens due to lamp degradation and suppress variation in brightness to preserve uniformity Setting BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN Adjust the brightness when displaying multiple screens using multiple projectors 1 Press A V to select BRIGHTNESS CONTROL 2 Press the ENTER button The BRIGHTNESS CONTROL screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN 4 Press 4b to adjust Adjustment Operation E Maximum amount of Range of adjustment Brightness E brightness correction Press the gt button The screen becomes brighter TRE maximum amountor correction is reduced Th to 20 100 Press the button The screen becomes darker li maximum AMOUNT correction is increased Note When using only one projector the value obtained by subtracting the value of the BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN from 100 is the maximum amount of brightness correction Brightness cannot be corrected through brightness control since the maximum amount of correction becomes 0 when BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN is at 100 96 Luminance will be unsteady for eight minutes after a lamp is turned on Make adjustments at least 8 minutes after starting projection The result of BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN adjustm
169. ction may occur In such a case use the PICTURE menu gt SYSTEM SELECTOR to switch to a system that matches the signal format Control computer Control computer Computer Computer Attention When connecting the projector to a computer or an external device use the power cord supplied with each device and commercially available shielded cables e Use a commercial cable with a ferrite core for connecting with the lt DVI D IN terminal Note When entering DVI D some external devices to be connected may require switching the setting using the DISPLAY OPTION menu gt DVI D IN EDID For an HDMI cable use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to HDMI standards If a cable that does not conform to HDMI standards is used images may be interrupted or may not be displayed The HDMI IN terminal of the projector can be connected to an external device with a DVI D terminal by using an HDMI DVI conversion cable but some devices may not project the image properly or function properly The DVI D IN terminal supports single links only When entering the SYNC ON GREEN signal do not enter sync signals to the lt SYNC HD gt terminal or the VD terminal f you operate the projector using the computer with the resume feature last memory you may have to reset the resume feature to operate the projector
170. d off standby mode when the MAIN POWER switch on the projector is set to lt ON gt and in projection mode Power on lt gt button Starts projection when the MAIN POWER switch on the projector is set to ON when the power is switched off standby mode Input selection lt RGB1 gt lt RGB2 gt lt DVI D gt VIDEO lt HDMI gt lt SDI 1 2 buttons Switches the input signal to project page 62 MENU button ENTER button A V 4 buttons Used to navigate through the menu screen page 65 ON SCREEN button Switches on display off hide the on screen display function 9 page 61 lt TEST gt button Displays the test pattern page 63 Number lt 0 gt lt 9 gt buttons Used when the system uses multiple projectors Used to input ID numbers or passwords STATUS button Displays the projector information lt LIGHT gt button Pressing this button lights up the remote control buttons The lights will go off when the remote control operation goes idle for 10 seconds Attention Do not drop the remote control Avoid contact with liquids or moisture Do not attempt to modify or disassemble the remote control 24 ENGLISH B Side 20 19 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 B Top B Bottom 21 UP AUTO SETUP button Automatically adjusts the image display position while projecting the image PROGRESS is displayed on the screen
171. d proceed to Step 5 5 Press A V to select DISPLAY DOTS and press 4P to adjust DISPLAY DOTS to the horizontal resolution of the signal source 6 Press A V to select MODE 7 Press the ENTER button Automatic adjustment is executed PROGRESS is displayed while automatically adjusting When complete the system returns to the AUTO SETUP screen Adjusting position automatically 1 Press AY to select AUTO SETUP 98 ENGLISH Chapter 4 Settings DISPLAY OPTION menu 2 Press the ENTER button The AUTO SETUP screen is displayed 3 Press AY to select POSITION ADJUST 4 Press 4b to switch the item OFF Does not perform automatic adjustment ON Adjust the screen position and size when automatic setup is executed Adjusting signal level automatically 1 Press AY to select AUTO SETUP 2 Press the ENTER button The AUTO SETUP screen is displayed 3 Press AY to select SIGNAL LEVEL ADJUST 4 Press 4b to switch the item OFF Does not perform automatic adjustment Adjusts black level on screen menu BRIGHTNESS and white level on screen menu CONTRAST when automatic setup is executed ON Note SIGNAL LEVEL ADJUST may not function properly unless a still image containing clear blacks and whites is input Set the backup function that switches the signal to the backup input signal as seamless as possible when input signal is di
172. damaged electric shocks short circuits or fire will result e Do not damage the power cord make any modifications to it place it near any hot objects bend it excessively twist it pull it place heavy objects on top of it or wrap it into a bundle Ask an Authorized Service Center to carry out any repairs to the power cord that might be necessary Completely insert the power plug into the wall outlet and the power connector into the projector terminal If the plug is not inserted correctly electric shocks or overheating will result e Do not use plugs which are damaged or wall outlets which are coming loose from the wall Do not use anything other than the provided power cord Failure to observe this will result in fire or electric shocks Please note that if you do not use the provided power cord to ground the device on the side of the outlet this may result in electric shocks Clean the power plug regularly to prevent it from becoming covered in dust Failure to observe this will cause a fire e f dust builds up on the power plug the resulting humidity can damage the insulation e f not using the projector for an extended period of time pull the power plug out from the wall outlet Pull the power plug out from the wall outlet and wipe it with a dry cloth regularly Do not handle the power plug and power connector with wet hands Failure to observe this will result in electric shocks Do not overload the wall outlet If the power suppl
173. e Focus adjustment screws a b and c can be turned to move the lens mount bracket back and forth Also tightening the fixed screws locks the lens mount bracket in place so it does not move When a projection lens with a large weight is installed or when the projector is installed on an inclination the lens may tilt and the focus may become unbalanced In these cases perform adjustment by referring to the relationship between the adjustment location and adjustment Screws 58 ENGLISH Chapter 3 Basic Operations Projecting B Front view diagram of the lens mounter viewed from the screen side Lens mount bracket Fixing screws All Note Focus adjustment screws a b and c are adjusted with the lens attached Adjustment procedure B Relationship between the adjustment location and adjustment screws Adjustment location inner side of the screen Location where the just focus point of the screen is in the a When the just focus point of the screen in V up top in the vertical direction is in the inner side of the screen Rotate counterclockwise When the just focus point of the screen in V bottom bottom in the vertical direction is in the inner side of the screen When the just focus point of the screen in H left left in the horizontal direction is in the inner s
174. e ENTER button The PROJECTION METHOD screen is displayed 3 Press AY to select the projection method FRONT FLOOR When installing the projector on the desk etc in front of the screen FRONT CEILING When installing the projector in front of the screen using the Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors optional REAR FLOOR When installing the projector on the desk etc behind the screen with a translucent screen When installing the projector behind the screen with a translucent screen using the Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors optional REAR CEILING 4 Press the ENTER button 5 When the confirmation screen is displayed press 4P to select OK and press the ENTER button Attention When the PROJECTION METHOD setting is changed confirm that COOLING CONDITION 9 page 110 is set correctly ENGLISH 109 Chapter4 Settings PROJECTOR SETUP menu Change the fan control depending on the direction of projection Set COOLING CONDITION according to the projection direction but set it to AUTO normally Using the projector with incorrect setting may shorten the life of the lamp n VERTICAL UP SETTING a FLOOR SETTING sr am CEILING SETTING 30 30 VERTICAL DOWN SETTING AR tm Projection direction 1 Press A V to select COOLING CONDITION 2 Press the ENTER button The COOLING CONDITION screen is displayed 3 Press A V to sele
175. e ENTER button to enter the text 8 Press A W 4 to select OK and press the ENTER button The name set to color temperature is changed Note When a name is changed display of USER1 USER2 is also changed GAMMA b 2 2p b b QD n You can switch gamma mode 1 2 3 Press A V to select GAMMA Press 4P or the ENTER button The GAMMA individual adjustment screen is displayed Press 4P to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button DEFAULT Factory default setting USER1 Allows you to change the name USER2 Refer to Changing the name of USER1 or USER2 9 page 75 for details DICOM SIM The picture becomes similar to that of DICOM standard 74 ENGLISH Chapter4 Settings PICTURE menu 1 0 1 8 Set so that images become as you like 2 0 2 8 can be set in increments of 0 1 2 0 2 8 increments of 0 1 1 When PICTURE MODE is set to DYNAMIC USER or DICOM SIM DEFAULT cannot be selected Note DICOM is an abbreviation of Digital Imaging and COmmunication in Medicine and is a standard for medical imaging devices Although the DICOM name is used the projector is not a medical device and should not be used for purposes such as diagnosis of display images Changing the name of USER1 or USER2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Press AY to select
176. e is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color This adjustment should be carried out by a person who is familiar with the projector or by a service person because a high level of skill is required to make a successful adjustment Pressing the DEFAULT button will restore the factory default settings for all items When COLOR MATCHING is set to other than DFF COLOR TEMPERATURE is fixed to USER1 e Set 3D COLOR MATCHING page 93 to set whether 2D and 3D signals are set separately or whether common data is used Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE When 2D and 3D settings are set separately NATIVE or 3D is displayed in the upper right of the menu Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE 96 ENGLISH Chapter4 Settings DISPLAY OPTION menu Adjusting the color matching using a colorimeter Use a colorimeter that can measure chromaticity coordinates and luminance to change the colors RED GREEN BLUE CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW or WHITE to desired colors 1 Press A V to select COLOR MATCHING 2 Press 4b to select 709MODE or MEASURED 3 Press the ENTER button The 709MODE or MEASURED MODE screen is displayed 4 Press A V to select MEASURED DATA 5 Press the ENTER button The MEASURED DATA screen is displayed 6 Measure the current luminance Y and the chromaticity coordinates x y using the colorimeter 7 Press A to select a color and press q gt
177. e name set in PROJECTOR NAME of NETWORK SETUP INF1 Manufacturername Panasonic Returns manufacturer name query DZ13K DS12K INF2 Model name query DW11K Returns model name DZ10K INFO er information XXXXX Returns information such as version number queries CLSS Class information query 1 Returns class for PJLink ENGLISH 169 Chapter 6 Appendix Technical information PJLink security authentication The password used for PJLink is the same as that of the password set for web control When using the projector without security authentication do not set a password for web control For specifications related to PJLink refer to the website of Japan Business Machine and Information System Industries Association URL http pjlink jbmia or jp english Since the network function of the projector supports the Art Net function you can control the projector settings with the DMX controller or application software using the Art Net protocol Channel definition The following table lists the channel definitions used for controlling the projector with the Art Net function Channel Control details Performance Parameter Initial value Remark 100 0 1 Light volume 0 Can be set in 256 steps adjustment between 100 and 0 0 255 No operation 0 7 RGB1 8 15 RGB2 16 23 DVI D
178. ected to the projector or to the projector body The longer the cable the more it is susceptible to noise Since using a cable while it is wound makes it act like an antenna it is more susceptible to noise When connecting cables connect GND first then insert the connecting terminal of the connecting device in a straight manner Acquire any connection cable necessary to connect the external device to the system that is neither supplied with the device nor available as an option Video signals containing too much jitter may cause the images on the screen to randomly wobble or wafture In this case a time base corrector TBC must be connected The projector accepts video signals including Y C signals analog RGB signals synchronous signals are TTL level and digital signals Some computer models are not compatible with the projector Use a cable compensator when you connect devices to the projector using long cables Otherwise the image may not display properly Refer to List of compatible signals page 179 for the types of video signals that can be used with the projector RGB 2 IN terminal pin assignments and signal names Outside view Pin No Signal name Pin No Signal name 1 R PR 9 1 15 2 G Y 10 GND 3 B Pg 11 GND ff OOO A 4 12 DDC data 6 00 O e 10 E OOO o 5 GND 13 SYNC HD rT 6 GND 14 VD 1 5 7 GND 15 DDC clock
179. ecting the registered signal R RASTER POSITION Registering new signals REMOTE 1 IN terminal lt REMOTE 1 OUT gt terminal REMOTE 2 IN terminal REMOTE2 MODE Remote control Remote control operations Renaming the registered signal Replacing the air filter unit Replacing the lamp unit Replacing the unit Resetting to the factory default lt RGB1 gt button Projector body Remote control lt RGB2 gt button Projector body Remote control RGB IN RoomView RS 232C S SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MESSAGE SAVE ALL USER DATA SCHEDULE SCREEN SETTING SDI 1 2 button Projector body Remote control SDI IN Security SECURITY SECURITY PASSWORD SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE Selecting the input signal SERIAL IN terminal SERIAL OUT gt terminal SERVICE PASSWORD Setting remote control ID numbers Setting up SHARPNESS SHIFT nise lt SHIFT gt button Remote CODfLlol se eesnin e petet 24 56 lt SHUTTER gt button Projector body Remote control SHUTTER SETTING SIGNAL LIST Specifications sRGB compliant video STANDBY MODE STARTUP INPUT SELECT STARTUP LOGO STATUS STATUS button Remote control Sub memory Switching off the projector Switching on the projector Switching the input signal SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW SYSTEM SELECTOR T Temperature ind
180. ector Chapter4 Settings PROJECTOR SETUP menu SUB VERSION Displays the sub version of the firmware of the projector NETWORK VERSION Displays the firmware version of the projector UPGRADE ET UK20 Displays the activation status based on the Upgrade Kit POWER ON TIMES Displays the number of times the power is turned on ON COUNT LAMP1 ON Displays the number of times the lamp is turned on LAMP2 ON LAMP1 Displays runtime in detail LAMP2 Displays runtime in detail ingre Aine Ce Displays the number of registered signals REMOTE2 STATUS Displays the control status of the REMOTE2 AC VOLTAGE Displays the status of the AC voltage COOLING CONDITION Displays the set cooling conditions When AUTO is set automatically recognized result is displayed MEMORY NO Displays the memory number of the input signal INPUT Displays the input terminal currently selected SIGNAL NAME Displays the input signal name SIGNAL FREQUENCY Displays the frequency of the input signal SYNC STATE Displays the synch polarity of the input signal V SYNC WIDTH Displays the vertical sync signal pulse width of the input signal SCAN TYPE Displays the scan type of the input signal SIGNAL INFORMATION TOTAL DOTS Displays the total dot count of the input signal DISPLAY DOTS Displays the number of input sig
181. emote control may not operate when the length of the cable exceeds 15 m 49 2 or when the shielding of the cable is inadequate ENGLISH 29 Chapter 2 Getting Started This chapter describes things you need to do before using the projector such as the setup and connections 30 ENGLISH Chapter 2 Getting Started Setting up Setting up There are six ways to set up the projector Set the PROJECTOR SETUP menu PROJECTION METHOD 9 page 109 depending on the installation location Set COOLING CONDITION page 110 to AUTO Using the projector with COOLING CONDITION set incorrectly may shorten the life of the lamp Mounting on the ceiling and projecting forward Setting on a desk floor and projecting from rear Using the translucent screen Menu item Method Menu item Method PROJECTION METHOD FRONT CEILING PROJECTION METHOD REAR FLOOR COOLING CONDITION CEILING SETTING COOLING CONDITION FLOOR SETTING Mounting on the ceiling and projecting from rear Using the translucent screen Setting on a desk floor and projecting forward Menu item PROJECTION METHOD Method REAR CEILING Menu item PROJECTION METHOD Method FRONT FLOOR COOLING CONDITION CEILING SETTING COOLING CONDITION FLOOR SETTING Portrait setting and projecting from the rear Using the translucent screen Menu item Method Portrait setting
182. en is displayed 3 Press A V to select OSD POSITION 4 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button 2 Sets to the center left of the screen 3 Sets to the bottom left of the screen 4 Sets to the top center of the screen 5 Sets to the center of the screen 6 Sets to the bottom center of the screen 7 Sets to the upper right of the screen 8 Sets to the center right of the screen 9 Sets to the bottom right of the screen 1 Sets to the upper left of the screen Setting OSD DESIGN Set the color of the menu screen OSD 1 Press A V to select ON SCREEN DISPLAY 2 Press the ENTER button The ON SCREEN DISPLAY screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select OSD DESIGN 4 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button 1 Sets to yellow 2 Sets to blue 3 Sets to white 4 Sets to green 5 Sets to peach 6 Sets to brown Setting OSD MEMORY Set hold for the position of the menu screen OSD cursor 1 Press A V to select ON SCREEN DISPLAY 2 Press the ENTER button The ON SCREEN DISPLAY screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select OSD MEMORY 4 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button ON Holds the cursor position ENGLISH 103 Chapter4 Settings DISPLAY
183. ents is reflected on all image signals internal test patterns and on screen menus The BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN setting is enabled even if BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP is OFF Setting BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP Set brightness control operation 1 Press A V to select BRIGHTNESS CONTROL 2 Press the ENTER button The BRIGHTNESS CONTROL screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP 112 ENGLISH Chapter4 Settings PROJECTOR SETUP menu 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Press the ENTER button e The BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP screen is displayed Press A V to select MODE Press 4 to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button OFF Does not correct the brightness of the screen by the brightness sensor Corrects the brightness of the screen by the brightness sensor GREG Automatically corrects screen brightness when lamp brightness changes PC Synchronizes nine or more projectors through a computer using the dedicated software Multi Projector Monitoring amp Control Software 1 Multi Projector Monitoring amp Control Software is included in the supplied CD ROM When AUTO is selected proceed to Step 7 Press A V to select LINK Press 4P to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button Performs corrections by the brightness sen
184. er are not necessary 174 ENGLISH Chapter 6 Appendix Technical information Attention e f a command is transmitted after the lamp starts illuminating there may be a delay in response or the command may not be executed Try sending or receiving any command after 60 seconds When transmitting multiple commands be sure to wait until 0 5 seconds has elapsed after receiving the response from the projector before sending the next command When transmitting a command which does not need a parameter a colon is not necessary Note If a command cannot be executed the ER401 response is sent from the projector to the computer If an invalid parameter is sent the ER402 response is sent from the projector to the computer ID transmission in RS 232C supports ZZ ALL and 01 to 64 as well as 0A to 0Z groups If a command is sent with a specified ID a response will be sent to the computer only in the following cases t matches the projector ID ID setting is set to ALL and RESPONSE ID ALL is ON ID setting is set to GROUP and RESPONSE ID GROUP is ON STX and ETX are character codes STX shown in hexadecimal is 02 and ETX shown in hexadecimal is 03 When multiple projectors are controlled When multiple projectors are all controlled When controlling multiple projectors together via RS 232C perform the following settings 1 Seta different ID for each projector 2 Set RESPONSE ID ALL to ON in
185. er unit or replacing it with a new one the lamp will light properly ENGLISH 159 Chapter 5 Maintenance Maintenance replacement Maintenance replacement Bef formi Gi e Make sure to turn off the power before maintaining or replacing the unit pages 52 55 When switching off the projector make sure to follow the procedures in Switching off the projector page 55 Maintenance 2 DL D Outer case Wipe off dirt and dust with a soft dry cloth e If the dirt is persistent soak the cloth with water and wring it thoroughly before wiping Dry off the projector with a dry cloth Do not use benzene thinner or rubbing alcohol other solvents or household cleaners Doing so may deteriorate the outer case When using chemically treated dust cloths follow the instructions written on its packaging Lens front surface Wipe off dirt and dust from the front surface of the lens with a soft clean cloth Do not use a cloth that is fluffy dusty or soaked with oil water Since the lens is fragile do not use excessive force when wiping the lens Attention The lens is made of glass Impacts or excessive force when wiping may scratch its surface Handle with care Air filter unit Perform maintenance of the air filter unit in the following cases The air filter is clogged with dust causing the filter replacement message to appear on the screen and the filter indicator FILTER to light in
186. ess the ENTER button The ADJUST CLOCK screen is displayed 5 Press A V to select an item and press 4P to set the local date and time 6 Press A V to select APPLY and press the ENTER button The setting of the date and time will be completed Setting the date and time automatically 1 Press A VW to select DATE AND TIME 2 Press the ENTER button The DATE AND TIME screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select ADJUST CLOCK 4 Press the ENTER button The ADJUST CLOCK screen is displayed 5 Press A V to select NTP SYNCHRONIZATION and press q gt to change the setting to ON 6 Press AY to select APPLY and press the ENTER button The setting of the date and time will be completed Note To set the date and time automatically the projector must be connected to the network f synchronization with the NTP server fails just after NTP SYNCHRONIZATION is turned ON or if NTP SYNCHRONIZATION is turned ON while the NTP server is not set NTP SYNCHRONIZATION will return to OFF e Access the projector via a web browser to set the NTP server Refer to Adjust clock page page 147 for details Automatically set the lens shift limit values and home position for the projector 1 Press A V to select LENS CALIBRATION 2 Press the ENTER button The confirmation screen is displayed 3 Press 4b to select OK and press the ENTER button To cancel select
187. et function ON 2 X X X Enables the Art Net function and sets the IP address to 2 X X X ON 10 X X X Enables the Art Net function and sets the IP address to 10 X X X ON MANUAL Enables the Art Net function and uses the IP address set in NETWORK SETUP When an item other than OFF is selected proceed to Step 3 3 Press the ENTER button The Art Net SETUP screen is displayed 4 Press A V to select an item and press q gt to switch the setting NET Enter NET to be used when the projector processes Art Net SUB NET Enter SUB NET to be used when the projector processes Art Net UNIVERSE Enter UNIVERSE to be used when the projector processes Art Net START ADDRESS Enter START ADDRESS to be used when the projector processes Art Net 5 Press A V to select STORE and press the ENTER button 6 When the confirmation screen is displayed press 4P to select OK and press the ENTER button Note When ON 2 X X X or ON 10 X X X is selected the IP address is searched and set automatically Network connections 1 1 0 The projector has a network function and the following operations are available from the computer using the web control e Setting and adjustment of the projector Display of the projector status e Sending of E mail messages when there is a problem with the projector The projector supports Crestron RoomView and the following application so
188. etting 162 ENGLISH Chapter 5 Maintenance Maintenance replacement Note The model numbers of accessories and optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice When to replace the lamp unit The lamp unit is a consumable component Since its brightness gradually decreases over time it is necessary to replace the lamp unit regularly The estimated duration before replacement is 2 500 hours but the lamp may go off before 2 500 hours has elapsed depending on individual lamp characteristics usage conditions and the installation environment It is recommended that the Replacement lamp unit be prepared earlier If you continue to use the lamp unit after 2 500 hours has elapsed the lamp turns off automatically after approximately 10 minutes as it will cause malfunction of the projector If the runtime of both of two lamp unit bulbs exceeds 2 500 hours the power will be switch off after approximately 10 minutes On screen display Lamp indicator REPLACE LAMP Se Ne GR Lame FJ The message is displayed for 30 seconds Pressing Over 2 300 hours 2 any button on the control panel or remote control within 30 seconds will clear the message Sm lights in red even during the standby z mode Over 2 500 hours odd ed remains displayed until you press any 1 ForPT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE 3 500 hours for PT DZ10KE 2 ForPT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE 3 300 hours for PT
189. f the lt FUNC gt button on the remote control 1 Press AY to select FUNCTION BUTTON 2 Press the ENTER button The FUNCTION BUTTON screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select a function DISABLE Disables the lt FUNC gt button P IN P Switches OFF USER1 USER2 USER3 in P IN P amp page 127 SUB MEMORY Displays the sub memory list page 132 SYSTEM SELECTOR Switches the SYSTEM SELECTOR setting page 77 SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW Switches the SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW setting page 75 FREEZE Temporarily pauses the image page 106 WAVEFORM MONITOR Displays the waveform of the input signal page 106 LENS MEMORY LOAD Calls the registered lens memory page 123 LEFT RIGHT SWAP Switches the flip horizontal settings page 93 1 Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE 4 Press the lt ENTER gt button Set the time zone date and time of the built in clock of the projector Setting the time zone 1 Press A V to select DATE AND TIME 2 Press the ENTER button The DATE AND TIME screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select TIME ZONE 4 Press 4b to switch TIME ZONE Setting the date and time manually 1 Press A VW to select DATE AND TIME 2 Press the ENTER button The DATE AND TIME screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select ADJUST CLOCK 122 ENGLISH Chapter4 Settings PROJECTOR SETUP menu 4 Pr
190. ftware of Crestron Electronics Inc can be used RoomView Express e Fusion RV RoomView Server Edition Attention When a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector the network connection must be made indoors Note e Crestron RoomView is a system of Crestron Electronics Inc that collectively manages and controls devices on multiple systems connected to a network using a computer For details of Crestron RoomView refer to the website of Crestron Electronics Inc English only URL http www crestron com To download RoomView Express go to the following website of Crestron Electronics Inc English only URL http www crestron com getroomview ALAN cable is required to use the network function 138 ENGLISH Chapter 4 Settings NETWORK menu E Example of a normal network connection Computer Projector LAN cable straight LAN cable straight Hub A web browser is required to use this function Confirm that the web browser can be used beforehand Compatible OS Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Mac OS X v10 4 v10 5 v10 6 v10 7 v10 8 Compatible browser Internet Explorer 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0 Safari 4 0 5 0 6 0 Mac OS Communication with an E mail server is required to use the E mail function Confirm that the E mail can be used beforehand Use a LAN cable that is compatible wi
191. g 3D movies aim to view one movie at a time and take a break as necessary When viewing 3D images for example when playing 3D games or using a PC where two way interaction is possible take an appropriate break every 30 to 60 minutes Watching for long periods of time may cause eye fatigue When preparing contents use contents properly created to be used for 3D This may cause eye fatigue or health problems When viewing 3D images pay attention to people and objects in the vicinity 3D video may be mistaken for actual objects and the related bodily movements can cause damage to objects and lead to injury Use 3D Eyewear when viewing 3D videos Do not tilt your head when viewing with 3D Eyewear Those who are near or far sighted those with weaker eyesight in one eye or those with astigmatism should use corrective glasses etc when using 3D Eyewear If the image appears distinctly double when viewing 3D video discontinue viewing Watching for long periods of time may cause eye fatigue View at a distance of at least three times the effective height of the screen Viewing at distance closer than the recommended distance may cause eye fatigue As with movies if there are black bands at the top and bottom of the video view at a distance of 3 times or more of the height of the video section Children younger than 5 or 6 years old should not use 3D Eyewear As it is difficult to gauge the reactions of children to fatigue and discomfort
192. g correct 62 s the BRIGHTNESS adjustment setting at a minimum 72 No image appears s the external device that is connected to the projector working properly s the shutter function in use 61 e f the power indicator ON G STANDBY R gt is flashing in red consult your dealer s the lens cover still attached to the lens 53 s the lens focus set correctly 56 image isifuzzy e s the projection distance appropriate 32 s the lens dirty 19 s the projector installed perpendicular to the screen s COLOR or TINT adjusted correctly 72 Color is pale or grayish s the external device connected to the projector adjusted correctly 48 s the RGB cable damaged Are the batteries depleted e Is the polarity of the batteries set correctly 28 Are there any obstructions between the remote control and the remote control 24 signal receiver of the projector Remote control does not s the remote control being used beyond its effective operation range 25 respond Are other forms of light such as fluorescent light affecting the projection 25 s the REMOTE CONTROL setting in CONTROL DEVICE SETUP set to 134 DISABLE e s the lt REMOTE 2 IN terminal used for contact control 177 s the ID number setting operation correct 28 cm doesnot s the on screen display function turned off hidden 103 Is the CONTROL PANEL setting in CONTROL DEVICE SETUP set to Buttons on
193. gher when HIGH ALTITUDE MODE is set to ON or the Smoke cut filter is used the light output may decrease by approx 20 to protect the projector 184 ENGLISH Chapter 6 Appendix Specifications B Applicable scanning frequency Refer to List of compatible signals page 179 for the types of video signals that can be used with the projector For video signal including Y C signal For RGB signal Horizontal 15 75 kHz 15 63 kHz Vertical 50 Hz 60 Hz Horizontal 15 kHz to 100 kHz Vertical 24 Hz to 120 Hz PIAS Panasonic Intelligent Auto Scanning system Dot clock frequency 162 MHz or less For YC C YPp Pp signal 525i 480i Horizontal 15 75 kHz Vertical 60 Hz 525p 480p Horizontal 31 5 kHz Vertical 60 Hz 750 720 60p Horizontal 45 kHz Vertical 60 Hz 1125 1035 60i Horizontal 33 75 kHz Vertical 60 Hz 1125 1080 50i Horizontal 28 13 kHz Vertical 50 Hz 1125 1080 24sF Horizontal 27 kHz Vertical 48 Hz 1125 1080 30p Horizontal 33 75 kHz Vertical 30 Hz 625i 576i Horizontal 15 63 kHz Vertical 50 Hz 625p 576p Horizontal 31 25 kHz Vertical 50 Hz 750 720 50p Horizontal 37 5 kHz Vertical 50 Hz 1125 1080 60i Horizontal 33 75 kHz Vertical 60 Hz 1125 1080 24p Horizontal 27 kHz Vertical 24 Hz 1125 1080 25p Horizontal 28 13 kHz Vertical 25 Hz 1125 1080 60p Horizontal 67 5 kHz Vertical 60 Hz e 1125 1080 50p Horizontal
194. h national legislation For business users in the European Union If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment please contact your dealer or supplier for further information Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union These symbols are only valid in the European Union If you wish to discard these items please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal Note for the battery symbol bottom two symbol examples This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved G Environment care information for users in China This symbol is only valid in China Panasonic Corporation Web Site http panasonic net avc projector Panasonic Corporation 2013 W0513HM3104 YI
195. hat the exhaust from the projector or other equipment or the air from the air conditioner does not blow toward the front of the projector Places with sharp temperature fluctuations such as near lights studio lamps Doing so may shorten the life of the lamp or result in deformation of the outer case due to heat which may cause malfunctions The operating environment temperature of the projector should be between 0 C 32 F and 45 C 113 F when using it at elevations lower than 1 400 m 4 593 above sea level and between 0 C 32 F and 40 C 104 F when using it at high altitudes 1 400 m 4 593 or higher lower than 2 700 m 8 858 above sea level If you use the Smoke cut filter the operating environment temperature should be between 0 C 32 F and 35 C 95 F However it cannot be used at high altitudes If you use the Replacement lamp unit for portrait mode the operating environment temperature should be between 0 C 32 F and 40 C 104 F when using the projector at elevations lower than 1 400 m 4 593 above sea level and between 0 C 32 F and 35 C 95 F when using the projector at high altitudes If you use the Smoke cut filter together the operating environment temperature should be between 0 C 32 F and 30 C 86 F Near high voltage power lines or near motors Doing so may interfere with the operation of the projector Places where there is high power laser equipment Di
196. have absorbed the gas or that the gas has got into your eyes or mouth seek medical advice immediately e Ask your dealer about replacing the lamp unit and check the inside of the projector When not using the projector for an extended period of time remove the batteries from the remote control Failure to observe this will cause the batteries to leak overheat catch fire or explode which may result in fire or contamination of surrounding area ENGLISH 7 Read this first CAUTION B MAINTENANCE Do not attach the air filter unit while it is wet Doing so may result in electric shock or malfunctions e After you clean the air filter units dry them thoroughly before reattaching them Do not touch the fan with your fingers or any other parts of your body when replacing the lamp unit Doing so can cause injury Ask your dealer about cleaning inside the projector once a year Continuous use while dust is accumulated inside the projector may result in fire e For cleaning fee ask your dealer B VIEWING 3D VIDEO PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE and PT DW11KE only Those with a medical history of oversensitivity to light heart problems or poor physical health should not view 3D images This may lead to a worsening of medical conditions If you feel tiredness or discomfort or other abnormality while viewing with 3D Eyewear discontinue viewing Continuing use may cause health problems Take a break as necessary When viewin
197. he ENTER button The NON OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL screen is displayed e If INTERLOCKED is set to OFF RED GREEN and BLUE can be adjusted individually 14 Press A V to select an item and press 4P to adjust the setting e Once the adjustment is completed press the MENU button to return to the BRIGHTNESS ADJUST screen ENGLISH 87 Chapter 4 Settings ADVANCED MENU menu 15 Press A to select UPPER LOWER LEFT or RIGHT in BLACK BORDER WIDTH 16 Press 4P to set the region width of the BLACK BORDER WIDTH adjustment When PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE or PT DZ10KE is used proceed to Step 17 When PT DW11KE is used proceed to Step 19 17 Press A V to select UPPER KEYSTONE AREA LOWER KEYSTONE AREA LEFT KEYSTONE AREA or RIGHT KEYSTONE AREA 18 Press 4 to adjust the tilt of the border between NON OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL and BLACK BORDER LEVEL 19 Press A V to select BLACK BORDER LEVEL 20 Press the ENTER button The BLACK BORDER LEVEL screen is displayed If INTERLOCKED is set to OFF RED GREEN and BLUE can be adjusted individually 21 Press A V to select an item and press q gt to adjust the setting BLACK BORDER WIDTH Right Projection range Edge blending WIDTH Right H MARKER Red i i c1 Edge blending START Right 1 IMARKER Green I i OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL Right NON OVERLAPPED BLACK LEV
198. he ENTER button 5 Press A V 4 to adjust CORNER CORRECTION UPPER LEFT UPPER RIGHT LOWER LEFT LOWER RIGHT SEST F HE HE HH LV LLLA AOE LULH LINEARITY Horizontal direction Vertical direction Note The menu or logo may run off the screen when GEOMETRY is set e f EDGE BLENDING 9 page 87 adjustment and GEOMETRY are used together correct edge blending adjustment may not be possible in certain environments The optional Upgrade Kit Model No ET UK20 can be used to expand the correctable range To purchase the product consult your dealer ENGLISH 83 Chapter4 Settings POSITION menu Only for PT DW11KE You can correct the trapezoidal distortion that occurs when the projector is installed tilted or when the screen is tilted 1 Press AY to select KEYSTONE 2 Press the lt ENTER gt button 3 Press A V to select the item to adjust 4 Press 4b to adjust KEYSTONE SUB KEYSTONE H LINEARITY Note The menu or logo may run off the screen when adjustments are performed with KEYSTONE e Correcting up to 40 for the tilt in the vertical direction is available for adjustments with KEYSTONE However the image quality will degrade and it will get harder to focus with m
199. he ENTER button to proceed to the initial setting Initial setting Tm Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DZ10KE Set the screen format aspect ratio and display position of the image After completed the initial setting you can change the settings of each item from the DISPLAY OPTION menu SCREEN SETTING 1 Press AY to select an item 2 Press 4b to switch the setting INITIAL SETTING SCREEN FORMAT Set as necessary for the screen in use MENUSELECT 4b CHANGE E SET e SCREEN FORMAT 9 page 97 SCREEN POSITION 9 page 97 3 Press the ENTER button Confirm the setting value and complete the initial setting Note f you press the MENU button while the INITIAL SETTING screen is displayed you can go back to the previous screen To continue operations after completed the initial settings refer to Selecting the input signal amp page 56 By default the time zone of the projector is set to 09 00 Japan and Korean Standard Time Change the setting in the PROJECTOR SETUP menu DATE AND TIME gt TIME ZONE to the time zone of the region where you use the projector ENGLISH 23 Chapter 1 Preparation About your projector About your projector 10 B Front Panasonic PROJECTOR Remote control indicator Flashes if any button in the remote control is pressed Power standby lt gt button Sets the projector to the state where the projector is switche
200. he lamp is lit Do not touch the air exhaust port directly when adjusting the adjustable feet page 25 ENGLISH 45 Chapter2 Getting Started Attaching removing the projection lens optional Attaching removing the projection lens optional Move the projection lens to the home position before replacing or removing the projection lens page 57 Attention Replace the projection lens after turning off the power of the projector Do not touch the lens signal receiver Dust or dirt may cause defective contact Do not touch the surface of the projection lens with your bare hands Before attaching the projection lens remove the lens cover attached to the projection lens Attach the projection lens using the following procedure Screw hole A Lens fixing screw Fig 1 Fig 2 1 Insert by aligning the projection lens mark orange with the mark on the projector body O to the left of LOCK and turn clockwise until it clicks Fig 1 2 Secure the projection lens with the lens fixing screw supplied Fig 2 Use a Phillips screwdriver to secure it in the screw hole A to the right of the projection lens mark orange Note e Some lenses may not have a screw hole for securing the projection lens Attention Turn the projection lens counterclockwise to confirm that it does not come out Store the removed dust sponge in a safe place to tr
201. he mains plug This apparatus is equipped with a three prong earthingtype mains plug This plug will only fit an earthing type mains socket This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug into the mains socket contact an electrician Do not defeat the purpose of the earthing plug WARNING This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures CAUTION To assure continued compliance follow the attached installation instructions which include using the provided power cord and shielded interface cables when connecting to computer or peripheral device If you use serial port to connect PC for external control of projector you must use a commercial RS 232C serial interface cable with ferrite core Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user s authority to operate This is a device to project images onto a screen etc and is not intended for use as indoor lighting in a domestic environment Directive 2009 125 EC Importer s name and address within the European Union Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH Panasonic Testing Center Winsbergring 15 22525 Hamburg Germany Product information for Turkey only EEE Y netmeli ine Uygundur EEE Complies with Directive of Turkey 2 ENGLISH Read this first IMPORTANT THE MOULDED PLUG U K only
202. hite level 100 of the video signal to the 100 position of the waveform monitor Adjusting red green and blue 1 Set COLOR TEMPERATURE to USER1 or USER2 page 72 2 Select Select line red on the waveform monitor 3 Adjust dark red areas Use RED in WHITE BALANCE LOW to adjust the black level 0 96 of the video signal to the 0 position of the waveform monitor 4 Adjust bright red areas Use RED in WHITE BALANCE HIGH to adjust the white level 100 of the video signal to the 100 position of the waveform monitor 5 Use the procedure for RED to adjust GREEN and BLUE Note Before adjusting the black level for DVI D signals HDMI signals and SDI signals confirm that the SIGNAL LEVEL setting is correct ENGLISH 107 Chapter4 Settings DISPLAY OPTION menu CUTOFF p J s s 0 Each red green and blue color component can be removed 1 Press AY to select CUT OFF 2 Press the ENTER button The CUT OFF screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select RED GREEN or BLUE 4 Press 4b to switch the item OFF Disables cutoff ON Enables cutoff Note When input is switched or a signal is switched the cutoff setting returns to its original setting off 108 ENGLISH Chapter4 Settings PROJECTOR SETUP menu PROJECTOR SETUP menu On the menu screen select PROJECTOR SETUP from the main menu and select an item
203. icator sss 158 TEST button Remote control TEST PATTERN ENGLISH 189 Index TEXT CHANGE TINT Troubleshooting Two window U UNIFORMITY Upgrade Kit V VIDEO button Projector body Remote control Ww WAVEFORM MONITOR 106 Z ZOOM snnm 80 ZOOM button Remote control sss 24 56 190 ENGLISH A A m c Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries These symbols on the products packaging and or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste For proper treatment recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002 96 EC and 2006 66 EC By disposing of these products and batteries correctly you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries please contact your local municipality your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste in accordance wit
204. ide of the screen When the just focus point of the screen in H right right in the horizontal direction is in the inner side of the screen b Rotate counterclockwise Rotate counterclockwise c Rotate counterclockwise Rotate counterclockwise 1 2 3 4 5 Press the FOCUS button on the remote control or the LENS button on the control panel to display the FOCUS adjustment menu Press VW to shift the focus of the entire screen once Press A to stop on any part of the screen to be the first just focus point e For the location where focus is shifted in this state the just focus point is on the inner side of the screen Loosen the fixed screws in the position relative to the location where the focus is shifted the most the location where the just focus point is shifted the most towards the inner side in Step 2 up to two rotations Turn screws clockwise in two locations or at least in one location to be adjusted Little by little turn the focus adjustment screws corresponding to the locations counterclockwise and stop where the image is in focus page 58 e f the screws are turned counterclockwise the tilt of the lens will change by moving the lens mount bracket of the lens mounter forward screen side and in the projected image on the screen the focus point in the opposite direction of the adjustment screws will move from the inner side of the screen to the o
205. ified number of lamps light temporarily to prevent decreased illuminance when a lamp is switched LAMP RELAY yyy Switch the lamp to be turned on automatically by specifying the day of the week and time The degradation of the lamp due to continuous usage can be reduced by automatically switching the lamp to be turned on when using the projector continuously for a week or more 1 Press A V to select LAMP RELAY 2 Press 4b to switch the item OFF Disables lamp relay 24H Switches the lamp daily 1TWEEK Switches the lamp weekly When 24H or TWEEK is selected proceed to Step 3 3 Press AY to select TIME 4 Press the ENTER button Enters adjustment mode the display is blinking 5 Press 4b to select hour or minute and press A or the number lt 0 gt lt 9 gt buttons to set a time Selecting hour allows setting of only the hour in increments of one hour and selecting minute allows setting of only the minute in increments of one minute between 00 and 59 6 Press the ENTER button The adjusted time is established When 1WEEK is selected in Step 2 proceed to Step 7 7 Press A V to select DAY OF THE WEEK 8 Press 4b to switch the item SUNDAY MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY Switches the lamp automatically on the set day of the week THURSDAY FRIDAY SATURDAY Note The LAMP RELAY function is en
206. in menu are displayed POSITION SHIFT DEFAULT MENU SELECT SUB MENU ENGLISH 65 Chapter 4 Settings Menu navigation 4 Press A V to select a sub menu and press or the ENTER button to change or adjust settings Some items will switch in order as follows each time you press q gt Ls jle c LILL I For some items press 4 to display an individual adjustment screen with a bar scale as shown below CONTRAST EN E J 4 gt ADJUST Note e Pressing the lt MENU gt button while the menu screen is displayed returns to the previous menu e Some items may not be adjusted or used for certain signal formats to be input to the projector The menu items that cannot be adjusted or used are shown in gray characters and they cannot be selected DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY and FRAME LOCK may not be displayed depending on the input signal Some items can be adjusted even if signals are not input Individual adjustment screen is cleared automatically if no operation is performed for approximately five seconds For menu items refer to Main menu page 66 and Sub menu 9 page 67 The cursor color depends on the settings of the DISPLAY OPTION menu ON SCREEN DISPLAY OSD DESIGN The selected item is displayed with the yellow cursor by the factory default n the portrait setting the menu is displayed sideways Resetting adjustment values to the factory default If the DEFAULT
207. ing and using the projector at an angle that exceeds 30 vertically set COOLING CONDITION gt page 110 Failure to observe this may shorten the life of the components or result in malfunctions E When using the Replacement lamp unit for portrait mode install the projector with the terminals surface facing down Do not use the projector tilted to the right and left front and back Using the projector at an angle that exceeds 15 in either direction may reduce the life of the components or result in malfunctions E Cautions when setting up the projector When installing and using the projector with a method other than the floor standing installation using the adjustable feet fix the projector using the five screw holes for ceiling mount as shown in the figure Screw diameter M6 tapping depth inside the set 16 mm 5 8 torque 4 0 5 N m Make a clearance of at least 5 mm 3 16 between the projector bottom and the setting surface by inserting spacers metallic between them Adjustable feet Mount Spacer Screw holes for ceiling mount M6 Adjustable feet The positions of screw holes for ceiling mount and adjustable feet
208. ings SIGNAL LIST menu To cancel the deletion press the MENU button to return to the REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST screen 3 Press the ENTER button The selected signal will be deleted Note Aregistered signal can also be deleted from REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE on the REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP screen APRECIA li al 1 Press A V 4b to select the signal to protect 2 Press the ENTER button The REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS screen is displayed 3 Press the ENTER button The REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP screen is displayed 4 Press A V to select LOCK 5 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button OFF The signal is not protected ON The signal is protected Note When LOCK is set to ON signal deletion image adjustment and automatic setup are not available To perform these operations set LOCK to OFF Asignal can be registered to the sub memory even if it is protected Even a protected signal will be deleted if INITIALIZE is executed 1 Press A V 4b to select the signal to set 2 Press the ENTER button The REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS screen is displayed 3 Press the ENTER button The REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP screen is displayed 4 Press A V to select LOCK IN RANGE 5 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button NARROW Select in most cases WID
209. ions 184 Dimensions see 187 Precautions for Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors rete denda eed edid 188 Index cette e rete cmm 189 14 ENGLISH Chapter1 Preparation This chapter describes things you need to know or check before using the projector ENGLISH 15 Chapter 1 Preparation Precautions for use Precautions for use sauti The projection lens optional is susceptible to effects due to vibration or impact Make sure to remove the lens when transporting When transporting the projector hold it securely by its bottom and avoid excessive vibration and impacts They may damage the internal components and result in malfunctions Do not transport the projector with the adjustable feet extended Doing so may damage the adjustable feet Cantiaps Ear TS E After removing the projection lens optional attach the dust sponge included with the projector Otherwise dust will accumulate inside and may cause malfunctions E Do not set up the projector outdoors The projector is designed for indoor use only E Do not set up the projector in the following locations Places where vibration and impacts occur such as in a car or vehicle Doing so may cause damage to internal components or malfunction Near the exhaust of an air conditioner Depending on the conditions of use the screen may fluctuate in rare cases due to the heated air from the air exhaust port or the hot or cooled air Make sure t
210. irectly in front of signal receiver Weight 134 g 4 7 ozs including batteries Dimensions Width 51 mm 2 Height 176 mm 6 15 16 Depth 28 mm 1 3 32 zi 2 4 Measurement measuring conditions and method of notation all comply with 15021118 international standards In the portrait setting the light output is 10 600 Im for PT DZ13KE and PT DS12KE and 9 600 Im for PT DW11KE Average value Weight varies for each product When using the projector at high altitudes 1 400 m 4 593 or higher lower than 2 700 m 8 858 above sea level the operating environment temperature should be between 0 C 32 F and 40 C 104 F If you use the Smoke cut filter the operating environment temperature should be between 0 C 32 F and 35 C 95 F However it cannot be used at high altitudes If you use the Replacement lamp unit for portrait mode the operating environment temperature should be between 0 C 32 F and 40 C 104 F when using the projector at elevations lower than 1 400 m 4 593 above sea level and between 0 C 32 F and 35 C 95 F when using the projector at high altitudes If you use the Smoke cut filter together the operating environment temperature should be between 0 C 32 F and 30 C 86 F If the PROJECTOR SETUP menu LAMP POWER is set to HIGH MIDDLE or NORMAL and an ambient temperature reaches 40 C 104 F or higher 35 C 95 F or hi
211. is set to 4 3 in PT DS12KE then selection and adjustment of SSCREEN POSITION are not available 5 Press 4b to adjust SCREEN POSITION AUTOSIGNAL K Set whether to execute automatic setup of signals automatically The screen display position or signal level can be adjusted automatically without pressing the lt AUTO SETUP button on the remote control on each occasion if you input unregistered signals frequently at meetings etc 1 Press AW to select AUTO SIGNAL 2 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button OFF Sets the auto signal function to off ON Executes automatic setup automatically when images are changed to unregistered signals during projection TAUTO SETUP 2 2 2 22020 0 Set this when adjusting a special signal or horizontally long such as 16 9 signal Setting with MODE 1 Press AY to select AUTO SETUP 2 Press the ENTER button The AUTO SETUP screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select MODE 4 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button DEFAULT Standard setting WIDE Select when an image aspect is a wide screen signal which does not meet the DEFAULT settings USER Select when receiving a signal with a special horizontal resolution number of display dots When DEFAULT or WIDE is selected proceed to Step 7 When USER is selecte
212. item is displayed and you can set and adjust items in the sub menu PICTURE L Sub menu item Factory default Page PICTURE MODE STANDARD 71 CONTRAST 0 71 BRIGHTNESS 0 72 COLOR 0 72 TINT 0 72 COLOR TEMPERATURE DEFAULT 72 GAMMA DEFAULT 74 SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW OFF 75 SHARPNESS 6 75 NOISE REDUCTION OFF 76 DYNAMIC IRIS 2 76 SYSTEM SELECTOR Y PPR 77 1 Depends on the signal input Note The factory default settings may vary depending on the picture mode POSITION I Sub menu item Factory default Page SHIFT 79 ASPECT DEFAULT 79 ZOOM 80 CLOCK PHASE Om 81 GEOMETRY OFF 81 KEYSTONE s 84 1 Depends on the signal input 2 Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DZ10KE 3 Only for PT DW11KE ADVANCED MENU Sub menu item Factory default Page DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY AUTOT 85 BLANKING 85 INPUT RESOLUTION 86 ENGLISH 67 Chapter 4 Settings Menu navigation Sub menu item Factory default Page CLAMP POSITION 24 86 EDGE BLENDING OFF 87 FRAME RESPONSE NORMAL 88 FRAME LOCK OFF 89 RASTER POSITION 89 1 Depends on the signal input 2 Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DZ10KE Note e Su
213. itten from the oldest signal The names to be registered are automatically determined by the input signals and memory numbers e f a menu is being displayed the new signals will be registered at the instant they are input eer ee II Registered signals can be renamed 1 Press AW 4b to select the signal of which name is to be changed 2 Press the ENTER button The REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS screen is displayed The memory number input terminal input signal name frequency synch polarity etc are displayed Press the MENU button to return to the SIGNAL LIST screen 3 Press the ENTER button The REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP screen is displayed 4 Press A V to select SIGNAL NAME CHANGE 5 Press the ENTER button The SIGNAL NAME CHANGE screen is displayed 6 Press A W 4 to select the text and press the ENTER button to enter the text 7 After the name is changed press A V 4 to select OK and press the ENTER button The registration is completed and the REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP screen returns When pressing A V to select CANCEL and pressing the ENTER button the changed signal name will not be registered and an automatically registered signal name will be used Registered signals can be deleted 1 Press A V 4b to select the signal to delete 2 Press the lt DEFAULT gt button The REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE screen is displayed 130 ENGLISH Chapter 4 Sett
214. ity password the security password is required to be initialized if the remote control is lost Consult your dealer for the method of initialization DISPLAY SETTING 1 Overlap the security message text or image over the projecting image 1 Press A V to select DISPLAY SETTING 2 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button OFF The text display is disabled TEXT The text display is enabled USER LOGO Displays the image registered by the user Note To create register the USER LOGO image use Logo Transfer Software included in the supplied CD ROM Change the text displayed when the text display is enabled by selecting TEXT in DISPLAY SETTING 1 Press A V to select TEXT CHANGE 2 Press the ENTER button The TEXT CHANGE screen is displayed 3 Press A W 4 to select the text and press the ENTER button to enter the text 4 Press A V 4 to select OK and press the ENTER button The text is changed Enable disable the button operations on the control panel and the remote control 1 Press A V to select CONTROL DEVICE SETUP 2 Press the ENTER button The CONTROL DEVICE SETUP screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select CONTROL PANEL or REMOTE CONTROL CONTROL PANEL You can set the limitation on the control from the control panel REMOTE CONTROL You can set the limitation on the control from the remote contro
215. jection area in blue BLACK Displays the entire projection area in black DEFAULT LOGO Displays the Panasonic logo USER LOGO Displays the image registered by the user Note To create register the USER LOGO image use Logo Transfer Software included in the supplied CD ROM 104 ENGLISH Chapter4 Settings DISPLAY OPTION menu STARTUP LOGO 1 Set the logo display when the power is turned on 1 Press A V to select STARTUP LOGO 2 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button DEFAULT LOGO Displays the Panasonic logo USER LOGO Displays the image registered by the user NONE Disables the startup logo display Note The startup logo will disappear in approximately 15 seconds To create register the USER LOGO image use Logo Transfer Software included in the supplied CD ROM UNIFORMITY 000000 00000000 Correct the brightness and color unevenness of the entire screen Setting each color 1 Press A V to select UNIFORMITY 2 Press the ENTER button The UNIFORMITY screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select WHITE RED GREEN or BLUE 4 Press 4b to switch Setting PC CORRECTION To use the PC CORRECTION function the optional Upgrade Kit Model No ET UK20 is required To purchase the product consult your dealer 1 Press A V to select UNIFORMITY
216. justs skin tone toward reddish purple 31 31 You can switch the color temperature if the white areas of the projected image are bluish or reddish Adjusting with color temperature 1 Press AY to select COLOR TEMPERATURE 72 ENGLISH Chapter4 Settings PICTURE menu 2 Press 4b or the ENTER button The COLOR TEMPERATURE individual adjustment screen is displayed 3 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button DEFAULT Factory default setting USER1 Adjusts white balance as desired Refer to Adjusting desired white balance page 73 for USER2 details 3200K 9300K Allows you to set in increments of 100 K Select so that images become natural Note e When PICTURE MODE page 71 is set to USER or DICOM SIM DEFAULT cannot be selected e When COLOR MATCHING page 96 adjustment is set to other than OFF COLOR TEMPERATURE is fixed to USER1 The color temperature numerical values are guidelines Adjusting desired white balance 1 Press A V to select COLOR TEMPERATURE 2 Press 4b or the ENTER button The COLOR TEMPERATURE individual adjustment screen is displayed 3 Press 4b to select USER1 or USER2 4 Press the ENTER button The COLOR TEMPERATURE screen is displayed 5 Press A V to select WHITE BALANCE 6 Press the ENTER button The WHITE BAL
217. l 4 Press the ENTER button The CONTROL PANEL screen or the REMOTE CONTROL screen is displayed 5 Press A V to select CONTROL PANEL or REMOTE CONTROL 6 Press 4b to switch the item You can set the operation restriction from the control panel or the remote control ENABLE Enables all button operations DISABLE Disables all button operations Operation of all buttons can be enabled disabled separately Refer to Enabling disabling any button page 134 for details USER 7 Press A V to select APPLY and press the ENTER button The confirmation screen is displayed 8 Press 4b to select OK and press the ENTER button Enabling disabling any button 1 Press A V to select CONTROL DEVICE SETUP 134 ENGLISH Chapter 4 Settings SECURITY menu 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Press the ENTER button The CONTROL DEVICE SETUP screen is displayed Press A V to select CONTROL PANEL or REMOTE CONTROL Press the ENTER button Press A V to select CONTROL PANEL or REMOTE CONTROL Press q gt to switch USER Press AY to select the button item to set e When INPUT SELECT BUTTON is selected press the ENTER button and then press A W to select the button to set Buttons that can be set CONTROL PANEL REMOTE CONTROL POWER BUTTON Power standby d button power on butto
218. lected command After the command is fixed press the MENU button to close the detailed setting screen 13 Press A V 4b to select STORE and press the ENTER button Note f you attempt to register the setting that would make the lamp turn on for a short time an error message will be displayed on the screen Set the time and command again To delete a command already set press the DEFAULT button on the Step 5 screen or select DELETE on the Step 6 screen and press the ENTER button f multiple commands have been set for the same time they are executed in chronological order starting from the smallest command number The operating time will be the local time page 122 e f an operation is executed with the remote control or control panel of the projector or with a control command before the command set in SCHEDULE is executed the command set with this function may not be executed STARTUP INPUT SELECT gt Set the input when the projector is switched on to start projection 1 Press A V to select STARTUP INPUT SELECT 2 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button LAST USED Keeps the input selected last VIDEO Sets the input to VIDEO RGB1 Sets the input to RGB1 118 ENGLISH Chapter4 Settings PROJECTOR SETUP menu RGB2 Sets the input to RGB2 DVI D Sets the input to DVI D HDMI Sets the input
219. lling accidents e Attach the supplied safety cable to the ceiling mount bracket to prevent the projector from falling down Installation work such as ceiling mount bracket should only be carried out by a qualified technician If installation is not carried out and secured correctly it can cause injury or accidents such as electric shocks e Be sure to use the wire provided with the ceiling mount bracket as an extra safety measure to prevent the projector from falling down Install in a different location to the ceiling mount bracket ENGLISH 5 Read this first WARNING B ACCESSORIES Do not use or handle the batteries improperly and refer to the following Failure to observe this will cause burns batteries to leak overheat explode or catch fire e Use AA R6 batteries e Do not use unspecified batteries Do not use chargeable batteries Do not disassemble dry cell batteries Do not heat the batteries or place them into water or fire Do not allow the and terminals of the batteries to come into contact with metallic objects such as necklaces or hairpins Do not store or carry batteries together with metallic objects Store the batteries in a plastic bag and keep them away from metallic objects Make sure the polarities and are correct when inserting the batteries Do not use a new battery together with an old battery or mix different types of batteries Do not use batteries with the outer cover peeling aw
220. locking the air intake Wait at least five minutes exhaust port in the current Status Install the projector in a location with an ambient a E SOR Vn Solution Install the projector in a temperature of 0 C 32 F to 45 C 113 F switch to 9 page 55 and consult your dealer location with an ambient temperature of 0 C 32 F to 45 C 113 F 1 Do not use the projector at high altitudes of 2 700 m 8 858 or higher above sea level Clean or replace the air filter unit page 160 1 When using the projector at high altitudes 1 400 m 4 593 or higher lower than 2 700 m 8 858 above sea level the operating environment temperature should be between 0 C 32 F and 40 C 104 F If you use the Smoke cut filter the operating environment temperature should be between 0 C 32 F and 35 C 95 F However it cannot be used at high altitudes If you use the Replacement lamp unit for portrait mode the operating environment temperature should be between 0 C 32 F and 40 C 104 F when using the projector at elevations lower than 1 400 m 4 593 above sea level and between 0 C 32 F and 35 C 95 F when using the projector at high altitudes If you use the Smoke cut filter together the operating environment temperature should be between 0 C 32 F and 30 C 86 F Note e f the temperature indicator lt TEMP gt is still lit or flashing after taking
221. lt LAMP1 gt lt LAMP2 gt the temperature indicator lt TEMP gt and the filter indicator FILTER will inform you by lighting or flashing Check the status of the indicators and manage the indicated problems as follows Attention When switching off the projector to deal with problems make sure to follow the procedure in Switching off the projector page 55 Lamp indicator lt LAMP1 gt Lamp indicator LAMP2 Temperature indicator TEMP oNG amf TEMP STANDBY R FILTER Filter indicator lt FILTER gt mi Lamp indicators lt LAMP1 gt lt LAMP2 gt indicator statis Lighting in red lighting in Flashing in red Flashing in red orange 1 time 3 times The lamp unit is not Time to replace the lamp installed A problem is detected in the lamp or the power supply for Status F unit page 163 e The unspecified lamp unit the lamp is installed e Was REPLACE LAMP displayed when you turned on the power The indicator lights up Have you turned on the Some eed nas occurred Cause ahente runtime orhe e s the specified lamp unit power again immediately in the lamp circuit Check installed ae for fluctuation or drop in lamp unit has reached after turning it off the source voltage 2 300 hours when LAMP POWER is set to HIGH 3 nstall the lamp unit if it is not installed e Install the specified lamp Wait a while until the Turn
222. makes the color deeper Press the 4 button Darkens the screen and makes the color lighter 31 31 Attention e Adjust BRIGHTNESS first when you need to adjust the black level You can adjust the dark black part of the projected image 1 Press A V to select BRIGHTNESS 2 Press 4b or the ENTER button The BRIGHTNESS individual adjustment screen is displayed Press 4b to adjust the level ao Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment Press the gt button Increases the brightness of the dark black parts of the screen Press the 4 button Reduces the brightness of the dark black parts of the screen 31 31 You can adjust the color saturation of the projected image 1 Press A V to select COLOR 2 Press 4b or the ENTER button The COLOR individual adjustment screen is displayed Press 4b to adjust the level oO Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment Press the gt button Deepens colors Press the 4 button Weakens colors 31 31 You can adjust the skin tone in the projected image 1 Press AY to select TINT 2 Press q gt or the ENTER button The TINT individual adjustment screen is displayed Press 4b to adjust the level C Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment Press the gt button Adjusts skin tone toward greenish color Press the button Ad
223. mediately after turning off the luminous lamp the fan runs using internally stored power to cool the luminous lamp When the projector is mounted on the ceiling or installed in an environment where the main power MAIN POWER switch of the projector cannot be easily turned OFF the power can be turned off directly using the circuit breaker It is also safe in case a power outage occurs or the power cord is pulled out immediately after the projector is switched off Note f the projector was turned off by turning off the circuit breaker directly during projection last time then the power indicator ON G STANDBY R gt will light in green a while after the circuit breaker is turned on and then projection of the image will start f cooled with the direct power off function projection may take a longer time than usual to start when the projector is switched on the next time Make sure that the fan is not running when packing the projector for transportation or storage ENGLISH 55 Chapter 3 Basic Operations Projecting Projecting Check the projection lens attachment page 46 external device connection page 48 power cord connection page 52 switch on the power page 53 to start projecting Select the video for projection and adjust appearance of the projected image Selecting thei ia Select an input signal 1 Press the input selection lt RGB1 gt lt RGB2 gt lt DVI D gt lt VIDEO gt lt H
224. n INPUT SELECT BUTTON nd button lt RGB1 gt button lt RGB2 gt button DVI D button lt HDMI gt button and SDI 1 2 MENU BUTTON MENU button LENS BUTTON LENS button Nicias button ZOOM button lt SHIFT gt AUTO SETUP BUTTON AUTO SETUP button SHUTTER BUTTON lt SHUTTER button ASPECT BUTTON ASPECT button ON SCREEN BUTTON ON SCREEN button OTHER BUTTON AV 4b ENTER button Buttons not listed above 1 Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DZ10KE Press 4 gt to switch the item ENABLE Enables button operations DISABLE Disables button operations The following items are available when SDI1 2 BUTTON is selected in INPUT SELECT BUTTON in PT DZ13KE and PT DS12KE TOGGLE Switches between SDI1 and SDI2 when the button is operated SDI1 Fixes to SDI1 SDI2 Fixes to SDI2 DISABLE Disables button operations When INPUT SELECT BUTTON is selected in Step 7 press the MENU button to return to the CONTROL PANEL screen or the REMOTE CONTROL screen Press AY to select APPLY and press the ENTER button The confirmation screen is displayed 10 Press 4P to select OK and press the ENTER button Note When a button operation is performed on the device set to DISABLE the CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD screen is displayed Enter the control device password The CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD screen will disappea
225. n RGB signal is input to the RGB 1 IN terminal or the RGB 2 IN terminal e e e Certain signals may not be adjustable CLAMP POSITION 1 You can adjust the optimal point when the black part of the image is blunt or it has turned green 1 Press A V to select CLAMP POSITION 2 Press 4b to adjust Status Rough guide for optimal value Range of adjustment The point where bluntness of the black part improves the most is The black part is blunt the optimal value 1 255 The point where the green part becomes black and the bluntness The Black part is green has improved is the optimal value Note e CLAMP POSITION can be adjusted only when a signal is input to the RGB 1 IN terminal or the RGB 2 IN terminal Certain signals may not be adjustable 86 ENGLISH Chapter 4 Settings ADVANCED MENU menu EDGE BLENDING 2 2 The edge blending function allows multiple projector images to be seamlessly overlapped by using the inclination of the brightness at the overlapped area 1 Press A V to select EDGE BLENDING 2 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button OFF Sets the edge blending function to off ON Use the setting value of the internal distortion of the set for the inclination of the edge blending area Use the user setting value for the inclination of the edge blending area Configuration
226. nal display dots TOTAL LINES Displays the total line count of the input signal DISPLAY LINES Displays the number of input signal display lines SAMPLING Displays the sampling information of the input signal SIGNAL LEVEL Displays the signal level of the input signal BIT DEPTH Displays the gradation of the input signal 1 The lamp runtime to be displayed is real time The following conversion is required to calculate the rough estimate for lamp replacement Model No Formula for lamp replacement time rough estimate A x 56 B x 40 C x 35 56 A Runtime when LAMP POWER is set to HIGH PT DZ13KE i PT DS12KE e B Runtime when LAMP POWER is set to MIDDLE PT DW11KE e C Runtime when LAMP POWER is set to ECO The formula when the optional Replacement lamp unit for portrait mode is used is Bx2 C 2 A x 40 B x 35 40 e A Runtime when LAMP POWER is set to NORMAL PT DZ10KE B Runtime when LAMP POWER is set to ECO The formula when the optional Replacement lamp unit for portrait mode is used is Ax2 B 2 Note The content of status can be sent via E mail by pressing the ENTER button while displaying the status e Some items in SIGNAL INFORMATION may be displayed and others not displayed depending on the signal being input f you attach a lamp unit used in a projector of a model different from the projector PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE PT DZ10KE to
227. nd IP addresses of projectors in same group detected over the network ak WN Display the status by color Green There is an allowance for brightness correction Yellow There is little allowance for brightness correction Red There is a brightness control error Display error detailed messages 7 Display error messages When the message Failed to apply BRIGHTNESS CONTROL to some projectors appears it means that synchronization with the projector displayed in red has failed Press A to select the projector displayed in red and press the ENTER button to display the error details 8 Update to the latest status information E Error details Error message Measures to take Limit the number of projectors in one group to eight When synchronizing nine or more projectors use the dedicated software Multi Projector Monitoring amp Control Software through a computer Please check the COMMAND e Set NETWORK CONTROL gt COMMAND CONTROL to ON for the projector in error CONTROL setting Set NETWORK CONTROL gt COMMAND PORT of all projectors to be linked to the same value Please check the USER NAME and PASSWORD in the COMMAND CONTROL setting Cannot apply BRIGHTNESS CONTROL Please check projector The projector is in standby Switch on the power status Exceed maximum number of projectors Assign the same User name and Password strings that have web control administrator
228. ned control command ERR2 Out of parameter range ERR3 Busy state or no acceptable period CR Message ERR4 Timeout or no acceptable period Ox0d ERR5 Wrong data length ERRA Password mismatch Data length 4 bytes 1 byte SSERIALINZ SSERIAL OUT terminal The SERIAL IN gt lt SERIAL OUT gt terminal of the projector conforms with RS 232C so that the projector can be connected to and controlled from a computer Connection Q Single projector Projector connecting terminals D Sub 9p female Qisses o D Sub 9p male D Sub 9p male Multiple projectors Connecting terminals on projector 1 Computer Communication cable straight Connecting terminals on projector 2 Computer D Sub 9p female esos D Sub 9p male D Sub 9p female OL D Sub 9p male Ol sor D Sub 9p male Communication cable Note D Sub 9p female D Sub 9p male Communication cable e The destination of RS 232C page 119 must be set according to the connection method Pin assignments and signal names Desub 3 pini female Pin No Signal name Details Outside view 1 NC 5 lt 1 2 TXD Transmitted data 3 RXD Received data 4 NC 9 C ie 9 5 GND Earth ANN 6 NC 7 CTS 9 6 8 RTS Connected internally 9 NC
229. ness control status 1 Press A V to select BRIGHTNESS CONTROL 2 Press the ENTER button The BRIGHTNESS CONTROL screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS 4 Press the ENTER button The BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS screen is displayed BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS screen display example When MODE of BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP is set to When MODE of BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP is set to OFF AUTO and LINK is set to OFF The screen shows the status that the brightness control is disabled The screen shows the status of the brightness control in one ja EE E BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS l P Q 5 H PROJECTOR 1 Quy RETURN RETURN 114 ENGLISH Chapter4 Settings PROJECTOR SETUP menu When MODE of BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP is set to When MODE of BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP is set to AUTO and LINK is set from GROUP A to GROUP D PC The screen shows the status of the brightness control of synchronized projectors up to eight units including the projector being controlled through the on screen menu 5 ood PROJECTOR 4 ui ii 1 T E PROJECTOR 192 168 30 2 E3 E prosector2 192 168 30 3 RETURN PROJECTOR3 192 168 30 4 4 5 r7 8 Display the name of the projector Display the synchronized group Display the IP address of the projector Display the names a
230. ng If NON OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL is tilted by correcting the keystone from KEYSTONE in GEOMETRY perform Steps 17 and 18 to adjust the edge blending according to the shape of NON OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL When the keystone is corrected with KEYSTONE the edge blending cannot be adjusted together Only for PT DW11KE FRAME RESPONSE 4 Set image frame delay 1 Press A V to select FRAME RESPONSE 2 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button NORMAL Standard setting FAST Simplifies the image processing to reduce image frame delay FIXED Sets image frame delay to be constant regardless of the image position or magnification 1 When input signals are other than interlaced signals FAST cannot be set 2 Only when movie based signals and still image signals with the vertical scanning frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz are input Note When FRAME RESPONSE is set to FAST picture quality deteriorates Also DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY cannot be set FRAME RESPONSE cannot be set during P IN P 88 ENGLISH Chapter 4 Settings ADVANCED MENU menu FRAME LOCK Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DZ10KE Set this to view 3D display when the vertical scanning frequency of the signal is 25 Hz 50 Hz and 100 Hz 1 Press AY to select FRAME LOCK 2 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch e
231. nging LAN settings while connected to the LAN may cause the connection to cut out 146 ENGLISH Chapter 4 Settings NETWORK menu Adjust clock page Click Detailed set up Adjust clock http 192 168 0 8 eg bin main cgi page TIME SET amp lang e B B6 X Projector control window x a pp Select Local time zone ee Current zone is GMT 09 00 NTP SYNCHRONIZATION LIO RO NTP SERVER NAME Up to 63 characters Date type is YYYY MM DD I 5 z Time types tms l 6 7 1 Time Zone 5 Date Select the time zone Enter the date to be changed 2 Set time zone 6 Time Updates the time zone setting Enter the time to be changed 3 NTP SYNCHRONIZATION 7 Set date and time Set to ON to adjust the date and time automatically Updates the date and time settings 4 NTP SERVER NAME Enter the IP address or server name of the NTP server when you set to adjust the date and time manually To enter the server name the DNS server needs to be set up Note The replacement of the battery inside the projector is required when the time goes out of alignment right after correcting the time Consult your dealer Ping test page Check whether the network is connected to the mail server POP server DNS server etc Click Detailed set up Ping test http 192 168 0 8 cgi bin main cal page PIN
232. nt is not carried out 3COLORS Adjusts the three colors RED GREEN or BLUE 7COLORS Adjusts the seven colors RED GREEN BLUE CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW or WHITE 709MODE NN i i MEASURED Refer to Adjusting the color matching using a colorimeter page 97 for details about this mode 3 Select 3COLORS or 7COLORS and press the ENTER button e The 3COLORS or 7COLORS screen is displayed 4 Press A V to select RED GREEN or BLUE RED GREEN BLUE CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW or WHITE for 7COLORS 5 Press the ENTER button The 3COLORS RED 3COLORS GREEN or 3COLORS BLUE screen is displayed For 7COLORS the 7 COLORS RED 7COLORS GREEN 7COLORS BLUE 7COLORS CYAN 7COLORS MAGENTA 7COLORS YELLOWJ or 7ZCOLORS WHITE screen is displayed e Set AUTO TESTPATTERN to ON to display a test pattern of selected colors 6 Press A V to select RED GREEN or BLUE 7 Press 4b to adjust The adjustment value changes between 0 and 2 048 Note Operation when correcting the adjustment color When the correction color same as the adjustment color is changed The luminance of the adjustment color changes When correction color red is changed Red is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color When correction color green is changed Green is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color When correction color blue is changed Blu
233. oloured GREEN AND YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E or by the Earth symbol L or coloured GREEN or GREEN AND YELLOW The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED How to replace the fuse Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse ENGLISH 3 Read this first WARNING E POWER The wall outlet or the circuit breaker shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible when problems occur If the following problems occur cut off the power supply immediately Continued use of the projector in these conditions will result in fire or electric shock e f foreign objects or water get inside the projector cut off the power supply e fthe projector is dropped or the cabinet is broken cut off the power supply e f you notice smoke strange smells or noise coming from the projector cut off the power supply Please contact an Authorized Service Center for repairs and do not attempt to repair the projector yourself During a thunderstorm do not touch the projector or the cable Electric shocks can result Do not do anything that might damage the power cord or the power plug If the power cord is used while
234. only one projector 3 Set RESPONSE ID ALL to OFF for all other projectors set in Step 2 When multiple projectors are all controlled by group unit When controlling multiple projectors by group unit via RS 232C perform the following settings 1 Seta different ID for each projector 2 Set RESPONSE ID GROUP to ON in only one projector 3 Set RESPONSE ID GROUP to OFF for all other projectors set in Step 2 Note There will be no response if two or more projectors have RESPONSE ID ALL set to ON There will be no response if two or more projectors of the same group have RESPONSE ID GROUP set to ON When setting multiple groups set RESPONSE ID ALL to ON in only one projector in each group Cable specification When connected to a computer When multiple projectors are connected 1 NC NC 1 1 NC NC 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 Projector 4 INC NC 4 Computer Projector 1 4 INC NC 4 Projector 2 SERIAL IN terminal 5 DTE specifications SERIAL OUT z SERIAL IN terminal terminal 6 NC NC 6 6 INC NC 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 NC NC 9 9 INC NC 9 ENGLISH 175 Chapter 6 Appendix Technical information Control command The following table lists the commands that can be used to control the projector using a compu
235. or the web control the screen may become white for a moment but it is not a malfunction Descriptions of items B http 192 168 0 8 cg bn mamn cgizpage MENU STATUS amp lanc e P Be x amp projector control window x 1 D 4 mE r 5 nU 6 1 Page tab 4 Detailed set up Switches pages by clicking this item The Detailed set up page is displayed by clicking this item 2 Status 5 Change password The status of the projector is displayed by clicking this item The Change password page is displayed by clicking this item 3 Projector control 6 CRESTRON RoomView The Projector control page is displayed by clicking this item The control page of RoomView is displayed by clicking this item ENGLISH 141 Chapter 4 Settings NETWORK menu Projector status page Click Status Projector status Display the status of the projector for the following items xps 192 108 0 8 cq bin mam agrepage MENU STATUSSang e Bex a Projector control window x 3T 6 PROJECTOR TYPE psi2k i s 3 4 JL 5 SHUTTER OFF LAMP SELECT SINGLE PROJECTOR TYPE 10 LAMP POWER Displays the type of the projector Displays the setting status of LAMP POWER page 112 MAIN VERSION 11 INPUT Displays the firmware ver
236. or video signals and Y C signals NTSC only 2 For RGB 480i or 480p signal input only 3 Standard signals are input signals with an aspect ratio of 4 3 or 5 4 4 Wide screen signals are input signals with an aspect ratio of 16 10 16 9 15 9 or 15 10 Note e Some size modes are not available for certain types of input signals DEFAULT cannot be selected for video signal Y C signal NTSC or RGB 480i 480p signal e f an aspect ratio which is different from the aspect ratio for the input signals is selected the images will appear differently from the originals Be careful of this when selecting the aspect ratio f using the projector in places such as cafes or hotels to display programs for a commercial purpose or for public presentation note that adjusting the aspect ratio or using the zoom function to change the screen images may be an infringement of the rights of the original copyright owner for that program under copyright protection laws Take care when using a function of the projector such as the aspect ratio adjustment and zoom function f conventional normal 4 3 images which are not wide screen images are displayed on a wide screen the edges of the images may not be visible or they may become distorted Such images should be viewed as with an aspect ratio of 4 3 in the original format intended by the creator of the images ZOOM mhxsbsv You can adjust the image size When ASPECT is set to other than
237. ore correction Install the projector so that the correction will be as small as possible 22 when using projection lens ET D75LE5 ET D75LE50 or 28 when using the projection lens ET D75LE6 Screen size will also change when KEYSTONE is used to perform various adjustments When the keystone is corrected with KEYSTONE the edge blending cannot be adjusted together Aspect ratio of the image size may shift depending on the correction or lens zoom value For the portrait setting keystone is corrected for horizontal tilt 84 ENGLISH Chapter 4 Settings ADVANCED MENU menu ADVANCED MENU menu On the menu screen select ADVANCED MENU from the main menu and select an item from the sub menu Refer to Navigating through the menu page 65 for the operation of the menu screen e After selecting the item press A V 4P to set You can increase the vertical resolution and enhance the image quality by performing cinema processing when the PAL or SECAM 576i signal the NTSC 480i signal and 1080 50i 1080 60i are input 1 Press A V to select DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY 2 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button AUTO Performs automatic detection and cinema processing Factory default OFF Does not perform cinema processing 25p FIXED Only during 576i or 1080 50i P signal input Performs forced cinema processing 2 2 pulldown
238. ow x E r 1 next 1 Administrator 3 Next Used to change the setting of the Administrator Used to change the setting of the password 2 User Used to change the setting of the User Administrator account B nttp 192 168 0 8 cgi bin main cgi page MENU PASS CHANGE amp lanc D 2 X i projector control window x 1 Account Administrator r 2 3 4 I De i 5 6 7 1 Account 5 New Password Displays the account to change Enter the desired new password Up to 16 characters in single 2 Current User name byte Enter the user name before the change 6 New Password Retype 3 Current Password Enter the desired new password again Enter the current password 7 OK 4 New User name Determines the change of password Enter the desired new user name Up to 16 characters in single byte ENGLISH 153 Chapter 4 Settings NETWORK menu User account http 192 168 0 8 c9 bin main cgi page MENU_PASS_CHANGESlanc D B X B Projector control window x 1 e I 3 5 1 Account 3 New Password Displays the account to change Enter the desired new password Up to 16 characters in single 2 New User name byte Enter the desired new user name Up to 16 characters in single 4 New Password Retype byte Enter the desired new password again 5 OK Determines the change of password Change password For u
239. p 720 x 483 31 5 59 9 27 0 R YID H A a V 625p 576p 720 x 576 31 3 50 0 27 0 R Y D H JV A 750 720 60p 1280 x 720 45 0 60 0 74 3 R YID H S M Z y 750 720 50p 1280 x 720 37 5 50 0 74 3 R YID H S A 1125 1080 60i 4 1 920 x 1 080i 33 8 60 0 74 3 R YID H S J V V 1125 1080 50i 1 920 x 1 080i 28 1 50 0 74 3 R Y D H S J V 1125 1080 24p 1920 x 1 080 27 0 24 0 74 3 R Y D H S PA V 1125 1080 24sF 1 920 x 1 080i 270 480 74 3 R YID H S 1125 1080 25p 1920 x 1 080 28 1 25 0 74 3 R YID H S 4 1125 1080 30p 1920 x 1 080 33 8 30 0 74 3 R YIDIHIS 1125 1080 60p 1 920 x 1 080 67 5 60 0 148 5 R YIDIH S 5 V 1125 1080 50p 1920 x 1 080 56 3 50 0 148 5 R YID H S 5 a y y 2K 24p 2 048 x 1 080 27 0 24 0 74 3 s s 2K 24sF 2 048 x 1 080 27 0 24 0 74 3 s s 640 x 400 31 5 70 1 25 2 R D H VESA400 640 x 400 37 9 85 1 31 5 R D H 640 x 480 31 5 59 9 25 2 R D H A y 640 x 480 35 0 66 7 30 2 R D H ES VGA480 640 x 480 37 9 72 8 31 5 R D H J a 640 x 480 37 5 75 0 31 5 R D H A V A 640 x 480 43 3 85 0 36 0 R D H ENGLISH 179 Chapter 6 Appendix Technical information
240. press the ENTER button the changed name will not be registered and the default name will be used If you select OK without entering any characters and press the ENTER button the default name will be used SAVE ALL USER DATA 1 11 Save the various setting values as a backup in the built in memory of the projector 1 2 3 4 Press A V to select SAVE ALL USER DATA Press the ENTER button The SECURITY PASSWORD screen is displayed Enter a security password and press the ENTER button When the confirmation screen is displayed press 4P to select OK and press the ENTER button PROGRESS is displayed while saving data LOADALLUSERDATA 1 11 11 Load the various setting values saved as a backup in the built in memory of the projector 1 2 3 4 Press A V to select LOAD ALL USER DATA Press the ENTER button The SECURITY PASSWORD screen is displayed Enter a security password and press the ENTER button When the confirmation screen is displayed press 4P to select OK and press the ENTER button Note The projector will go into the standby status to reflect the setting values when LOAD ALL USER DATA is executed Data registered from a computer is not included in ALL USER DATA TINITIALIZE LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL Return various setting values to their factory default settings 1 2 3 4 Press A V to select INITIALIZE Press the
241. r when there is no operation for approx 10 seconds e f the operations of both CONTROL PANEL and REMOTE CONTROL are set to DISABLE the projector cannot be turned off cannot enter standby When the setting has completed the menu screen will disappear To operate continuously press the MENU button to display the main menu Even when button operation on the remote control is disabled the ID SET button and the ID ALL button are enabled CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE eee The control device password can be changed 1 2 3 Press A V to select CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE Press the ENTER button The CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE screen is displayed Press AW 4 to select the text and press the ENTER button to enter the text ENGLISH 135 Chapter 4 Settings SECURITY menu 4 Press A V 4 to select OK and press the ENTER button To cancel select CANCEL Attention The initial password is AAAA by the factory default or when ALL USER DATA in INITIALIZE page 125 is executed Change the password periodically that is hard to guess 136 ENGLISH Chapter 4 Settings NETWORK menu NETWORK menu menu On the menu screen select NETWORK from the main menu and select an item from the sub Refer to Navigating through the menu page 65 for the operation of the menu screen e After selecting the item press A W 4P to set
242. ram number has not been set How to set a program Set up to 16 commands to each program 1 Press A V to select SCHEDULE 2 Press 4b to select ON and press the ENTER button The SCHEDULE screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select PROGRAM EDIT 4 Press 4b to select a program number and press the ENTER button 5 Press A V to select a command number and press the ENTER button e You can change the page using q gt 6 Press A W 4b to select TIME and press the ENTER button 7 Press 4b to select hour or minute and press A or the number lt 0 gt lt 9 gt buttons to set a time and then press the ENTER button 8 Press A V 4b to select COMMAND 9 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button e For the detailed settings of COMMAND the details set in Step 11 are displayed COMMAND DE COMMAND zu Description POWER ON Switches on the projector STANDBY Enters standby SHUTTER OPEN Opens the shutter CLOSE Closes the shutter ENGLISH 117 Chapter4 Settings PROJECTOR SETUP menu Detailed settings of ee COMMAND COMMAND Description VIDEO Switches the input to VIDEO RGB1 Switches the input to RGB1 RGB2 Switches the input to RGB2 DVI D Switches the input to DVI D INPUT HDMI Switches the input to HDMI PT DZ1
243. rd Top to bottom 0 599 PT DS12KE Top to bottom Press the gt The blanking zone 0 524 button moves upward PT DW11KE Top to bottom 0 383 Bottom of the LOWER l screen Press the 4 The blanking zone button moves downward Press the gt The blanking zone button moves to the right Left pana the LEFT l Press the 4 The d e PT DZ13KE PT DZ10KE button moves to the left Left to right 0 959 PT DS12KE Left to right Press the 4 The blanking zone 0 699 button moves to the right PT DW11KE Left to right Rightside ofthe RIGHT aes screen Press the gt The blanking zone button moves to the left You can adjust to achieve an optimal image when there is a flickering image or smeared outlines 1 Press A V to select INPUT RESOLUTION 2 Press the ENTER button The INPUT RESOLUTION screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select TOTAL DOTS DISPLAY DOTS TOTAL LINES or DISPLAY LINES and press lt gt to adjust it Values corresponding to the signal being input are displayed automatically for each item Increase or decrease the displayed values and adjust to the optimal point viewing the screen when there are vertical stripes or sections are missing from the screen Note Previously mentioned vertical banding will not occur with all white signal input The image may be disrupted while performing the adjustment but it is not a malfunction INPUT RESOLUTION can be adjusted only when a
244. recting a laser beam onto the lens surface causes damage to the DLP chips E Be sure to ask a specialized technician or your dealer when installing the projector on a ceiling The optional Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors is required Model No ET PKD310H for High Ceilings ET PKD310S for Low Ceilings E Lens focus The high clarity projection lens is thermally affected by the light from the light source making the focus unstable in the period just after switching on the power Wait at least 30 minutes with the image projected before adjusting the lens focus E Make sure to set HIGH ALTITUDE MODE to ON when using the projector at elevations between 1 400 m 4 593 or higher and lower than 2 700 m 8 858 above sea level Failure to do so may shorten the life of the components and result in malfunctions E Make sure to set HIGH ALTITUDE MODE to OFF when using the projector at elevations lower than 1 400 m 4 593 above sea level Failure to do so may shorten the life of the components and result in malfunctions E Do not install the projector at elevations of 2 700 m 8 858 or higher above sea level Doing so may shorten the life of the components and result in malfunctions 16 ENGLISH Chapter 1 Preparation Precautions for use E Do not use the projector tilted to the right or left Using the projector at a vertical angle that exceeds 15 may reduce product life or result in malfunction B When install
245. red Removing the air filter unit Air filter unit compartment and the Air filter cover fixing screw projector s air intake port By Tabs on the projector body Air filter cover Air filter unit Fig 1 Fig 2 Fig 3 1 Remove the air filter cover Fig 1 Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the air filter cover screw counterclockwise until it turns freely and then remove the air filter cover Loosen the air filter cover fixing screw while putting your hand on 2 Pull out the air filter unit Pull out the air filter unit frame from the tabs of the projector body while slightly pressing around the center of the frame at the front side with the lens inward as described with the arrow and pull out the frame at the opposite side from the tabs to remove the air filter unit Fig 2 After pulling out the air filter unit remove large foreign objects and dust from the air filter unit compartment and the air intake port of the projector body if there are any Fig 3 160 ENGLISH Chapter 5 Maintenance Maintenance replacement Cleaning the air filter unit Remove the air filter unit beforehand with the previously described procedure of Removing the air filter unit 1 2 Fig 1 Fig 2 Wash the air filter unit Fig 1 Soak the air filter unit in cold or warm water and then lightly rinse it Do not use cleaning tools such as brushes When rinsing hold the frame of the air filter unit
246. ress 4P to switch the page 3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS If you view 3D images please note below In addition when 3D images will be viewed by unspecified number of people or used for commercial applications someone in authority should convey the following precautions To enjoy 3D images safely and comfortably please refer to the Operating Instructions for in depth description 4 gt CHANGE EXIT 3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Please refrain from viewing 3D images if you do not feel well or are experiencing visual fatigue Please use the contents which has been properly made for 3D View from at least the recommended distance 3 times the effective height of the screen Refer to the Operating Instructions if this message is no longer needed 4 gt CHANGE EXIT ENGLISH 95 Chapter4 Settings DISPLAY OPTION menu DISPLAY OPTION menu On the menu screen select DISPLAY OPTION from the main menu and select an item from the sub menu Refer to Navigating through the menu page 65 for the operation of the menu screen e After selecting the item press A W p to set Correct the color difference between projectors when using multiple projectors simultaneously Adjusting the color matching as desired 1 Press A V to select COLOR MATCHING 2 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button OFF Color matching adjustme
247. rightness will be the same as the standard brightness when the brightness control is adjusted Lamp brightness cannot be measured during the eight minutes after it is turned on because it is not steady e f a lamp turns off or lamp relay is performed while MODE in BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP is set to AUTO and LAMP SELECT is set to DUAL brightness is corrected to the extent possible one minute later When MODE in BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP is set to AUTO and LINK is set to OFF brightness will be corrected until it reaches the maximum amount of correction The variation in brightness may increase due to dust accumulating on the lens screen or inside the projector depending on the installation environment of the projector Adjust brightness control again when lamp degradation causes increased variation in brightness or a lamp is replaced For continued use longer than 24 hours set the BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP to CALIBRATION TIME or set LAMP RELAY 9 page 111 If it is not set correction will not be performed automatically Brightness control and iris operate simultaneously but the iris is fully open and does not operate while a brightness measurement is performed The CALIBRATION TIME setting will be reflected at the time when you enter the time The CALIBRATION MESSAGE setting will be reflected at the time when items are switched using q gt Displaying BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS Display the bright
248. roperly The signal will be reflected off the screen However the operating range may be limited from light reflection loss due to the screen material If the remote control signal receiver directly receives strong light such as fluorescent light the remote control may not operate properly Use itin a place distant from the light source The power indicator ON G STANDBY R gt will flash if the projector receives a remote control signal 14 E Bottom m WARNING Keep your hands and other objects away from the air Q exhaust port C0000 E Ns Keep your hands and face away p M y UN Do not insert your fingers DD DU i M il m 00 my Keep heat sensitive objects away UDUL gg DOO DD Heated air from the air exhaust port can cause burns injury or RED rupis ERE deformations 1 900 nn i Bo 00 Ifoga pn E _ 000 00 1 Power indicator ON G STANDBY R gt ER UE Are Displays the status of the power da R Oo MM 4 DU niy 00 le Ea DRE 2 L
249. rt Doing so will cause burns or damage your hands or other objects e Heated air comes out of the air exhaust port Do not place your hands or face or objects which cannot withstand heat close to this port Do not look at the light emitted from the lens while the projector is being used Doing so can cause loss of sight e Strong light is emitted from the projector s lens Do not directly look at this light e Be especially careful not to let young children look into the lens In addition turn off the power and switch off the main power when you are away from the projector Never attempt to remodel or disassemble the projector High voltages can cause fire or electric shocks e For any inspection adjustment and repair work please contact an Authorized Service Center Do not project an image with the lens cover of the projection lens optional attached Doing so can cause fire Do not allow metal objects flammable objects or liquids to enter inside of the projector Do not allow the projector to get wet Doing so may cause short circuits or overheating and result in fire electric shock or malfunction of the projector e Do not place containers of liquid or metal objects near the projector e If liquid enters inside of the projector consult your dealer e Particular attention must be paid to children Use the ceiling mount bracket specified by Panasonic Using the ceiling mount bracket other than the specified one will result in fa
250. s 16 9 Unit m Lens type Zoom lens Projection lens Model No ET D75LE1 ET D75LE2 ET D75LE3 ET D75LE4 ET D75LE8 ET D75LE6 Throw ratio 1 5 2 0 1 2 0 30 1 3 0 5 0 1 5 0 8 0 1 8 0 15 0 1 1 0 1 2 1 Projection screen size Projection distance L B Height gt Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Diagona SD E E E m qw rT QW LT QW CD aw tm 1 78 70 0 872 1 550 2 26 3 02 3 06 4 60 4 61 7 74 7 75 12 40 12 12 23 06 1 52 1 82 2 03 80 0 996 1 771 2 60 3 47 3 51 5 27 528 8 86 8 87 14 18 13 90 26 41 1 75 2 09 2 29 90 1 121 1 992 2 93 3 92 3 95 5 95 5 96 9 99 9 99 15 97 15 69 29 76 1 97 2 36 2 54 100 1 245 2 214 3 27 4 36 440 6 62 6 63 11 11 11 11 17 76 17 47 33 10 2 20 2 63 3 05 120 1 494 2 657 3 93 5 26 5 30 7 96 7 97 13 35 13 36 21 33 21 04 39 79 2 65 3 17 3 81 150 1 868 3 321 4 94 6 60 6 64 9 98 9 99 16 72 16 73 26 68 26 40 49 83 3 33 3 98 5 08 200 2 491 4 428 6 61 8 83 8 89 13 34 13 35 22 34 22 34 35 61 35 33 66 56 4 45 5 33 6 35 250 3 113 5 535 8 28 11 06 11 13 16 70 16 71 27 95 27 96 44 54 44 26 83 29 5 58 6 68 7 62 300 3 736 6 641 9 95 1
251. s a trademark of RealD Inc e Some of the fonts used in the on screen menu are Ricoh bitmap fonts which are manufactured and sold by Ricoh Company Ltd All other names company names and product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Please note that the 9 and TM symbols are not specified in this manual E Illustrations in this manual e llustrations of the projector screen and other parts may vary from the actual product E Reference pages e Reference pages in this manual are indicated as page 00 B Term n this manual the Wireless wired remote control unit accessory is referred to as Remote control 10 ENGLISH _ Features of the Projector _ High luminance and high color reproduction gt High luminance and high color reproduction are achieved with a small size by means of a unique optical system and lamp drive system Easy setup and improved serviceability gt In addition to the extensive lineup of optional lenses that allows more flexible setup of the projector portrait mode is supported Improved cost performance in maintenance fee gt The extended life filter reduces maintenance costs For details refer to the corresponding pages 1 Setup the projector 9 page 31 i 2 Attach the projection lens optional 9 page 46 3 Connect with external devices 9 page 48 4 Connect the power cord 9 page 52
252. s reached the value set at the right field LAMP2 RUNTIME An E mail message is sent when the remaining lamp on time for the lamp 2 has reached the value set at the right field INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Send an E mail when the air intake temperature has reached the value set at the above field PERIODIC REPORT Place a check mark on this to send an E mail periodically It will be sent on the days and time with the check mark 9 Submit Update the settings Note e Set each item of LAMP1 RUNTIME to LAMP2 RUNTIME to 500 hours or less when using the optional Replacement lamp unit for portrait mode Model No ET LAD320P 1 pc ET LAD320PW 2 pcs ENGLISH 149 Chapter 4 Settings NETWORK menu Authentication set up page Set the authentication items when POP authentication or SMTP authentication is necessary to send an E mail Click Detailed set up Authentication set up ttp 192 168 0 8 cg bin main cqi page AUTH_SETBlang e nte gibi gi pag g D B X amp Projector control window x meas 8 Auth 5 Password Select the authentication method specified by your Internet Enter the password for the POP server or the SMTP server service provider 6 SMTP server port SMTP Auth Enter the port number of the SMTP server Set when the SMTP authentication is selected Normally 25 POP server name 7 POP server por
253. screen So SH OC L1 Sw SW Unit m L LW LT 1 Projection distance Ei Lens protrusion dimension SH Image height SW Image width SD Image diagonal size 1 LW Minimum projection distance when the Zoom Lens is used LT Maximum projection distance when the Zoom Lens is used Unit m Projection lens Model No L1 dimension approximate value ET D75LE1 0 1144 ET D75LE2 0 0989 ET D75LE3 0 1024 ET D75LE4 0 1263 ET D75LE5 0 2024 ET D75LE6 0 2119 ET D75LE8 0 2544 ET D75LE10 0 125 ET D75LE20 0 121 ET D75LE30 0 121 ET D75LE40 0 124 ET D75LE50 0 203 Attention e Before setting up read Precautions for use page 16 Do not use the projector and the high powered laser equipment in the same room The DLP chips can be damaged if a laser beam hits the lens surface 32 ENGLISH Chapter 2 Getting Started Setting up GEOMETRY projection range Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DZ10KE VERTICAL KEYSTONE viewed from the side HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE viewed from above Horizontal arc correction viewed from above L2 Projection distance R2 Arc radius center L3 Projection distance R3 Arc radius L2 e a 12 Projection distance R2 Arc radius D L
254. screen B http 192 168 0 8 cgi bin maln cg peges MENU PROJ SETTING amp lans D B C X Projector control window x G Proj PROJECTOR NAME PROJECTOR SUBNET MASK DEFAULT GATEWAY 1 PROJECTOR NAME Enter the name of the projector Enter the host name if it is required when using a DHCP server etc 2 DHCP ON DHCP OFF To enable the DHCP client function set to DHCP ON 3 IP ADDRESS Enter the IP address when not using a DHCP server 4 SUBNET MASK Enter the subnet mask when not using a DHCP server 5 DEFAULT GATEWAY Enter the default gateway address when not using a DHCP server Note DNS1 Enter the DNS1 server address Permissible characters for the entry of DNS1 server address primary Numbers 0 9 period Example 192 168 0 253 DNS2 Enter the DNS2 server address Available characters for the entry of DNS2 server address secondary Numbers 0 9 period Example 192 168 0 254 Back Next Click the Back button to return to the original screen The current settings are displayed by pressing the Next button Click the Submit button to update the settings When you use the Forward and Back functions of your browser a warning message Page has Expired may appear In that case click Network config again since the following operation will not be guaranteed Cha
255. ser rights Only the change of password is enabled under the user rights B http 192 168 0 8 cgi bin main cgi page MENU PASS CHANGESJanc BG X Projector control window x l Lo rok 3 I 4 1 Old Password 3 Retype Enter the current password Enter the desired new password again 2 New Password 4 OK Enter the desired new password Up to 16 characters in single Determines the change of password byte Note To change the account of the administrator you must enter the User name and Password in Current CRESTRON RoomView page The projector can be monitored controlled with RoomView To start the RoomView control page from the web control screen you need to access with the administrator rights For user rights the CRESTRON RoomView button is not displayed on the web control screen The control page of RoomView is displayed by clicking CRESTRON RoomView It is not displayed if Adobe Flash Player is not installed on the computer used or the browser used does not support Flash In that case click Back on the control page to go back to the previous page 154 ENGLISH Chapter 4 Settings NETWORK menu Control page RGB1 P So C G http 192 168 0 8 c9 bin roomview cgirlang jp p B x amp Crestron Roomview Con lil mx Tools Info Help 1 Input Select 4 MENU A ENTER P
256. sion of the projector Displays the status of the selected input POWER 12 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Displays the status of the power Displays the status of the air intake temperature of the projector SHUTTER 13 OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE Displays the status of the shutter ON closed OFF open Displays the status of the internal temperature of the projector LAMP SELECT 14 AROUND LAMP TEMPERATURE Displays the setting status of LAMP SELECT page 110 Displays the status of the temperature around the lamp of the SERIAL NUMBER projector Displays the serial number of the projector 15 LAMP1 LAMP2 RUNTIME NETWORK VERSION Displays the status and the runtime converted value of the Displays the version of the firmware of the network lamp REMOTE2 STATUS 16 SELF TEST u Displays the control status of the lt REMOTE 2 IN terminal Displays the self diagnosis information OSD 17 PROJECTOR RUNTIME Displays the status of the on screen display 142 ENGLISH Displays the runtime of the projector Chapter 4 Settings NETWORK menu Error information page When Error Detail or Warning Detail is displayed in the self diagnosis display of the Projector status screen click it to display the error warning details The projector may go into the standby status to protect the projector depending on the contents of the error B http 192 198 0 8 ca bn mam carmoace MENU STATUSSIang e 1
257. sor in one projector without synchronizing with the other OFF projectors The period in which the constant brightness kept by the small value of BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN is prolonged ICROURAI Synchronizes corrections in multiple projectors by the brightness sensor GROUP B ae GROUP C You can set up to four groups A to D within the same subnet by using the network function GROUP D You can also register and synchronize up to eight projectors in one group Press A V to select CALIBRATION TIME Press the ENTER button Enters adjustment mode the display is blinking Press 4P to select hour or minute and press A W or the number lt 0 gt lt 9 gt buttons to set a time e Selecting hour allows setting of only the hour in increments of one hour and selecting minute allows setting of only the minute in increments of one minute between 00 and 59 f you do not specify the time select OFF between 23 and 00 o clock or between 59 and 00 minutes Press the ENTER button CALIBRATION TIME is set Brightness is measured at the specified time Dynamic iris is fixed to open during measurement Press A V to select CALIBRATION MESSAGE Press 4 to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button ON Messages are displayed during calibration OFF Messages are not displayed during calibration Press AY to select APPLY
258. splays the current setting DNS Server Displays the current setting Exit Returns to the control page ENGLISH 155 Chapter 4 Settings NETWORK menu Info page Click Info on the control page Projector Information 1 Ponce BEREIT wee Sawa ane i 3 DM m 1 Projector Name 5 Source Displays the projector name Displays the selected input 2 Mac Address 6 Lamp Mode Displays the MAC address Displays LAMP POWER 9 page 112 3 Lamp Hours 7 Error Status Displays the runtime of the lamps converted value Displays the error status 4 Power Status 8 Exit Displays the status of the power Returns to the control page Help page Click Help on the control page The Help Desk window is displayed nttp 192 168 0 8 cgi bin roomview egnlangs jp A BEX amp Crestron Roomview Con x Tools Into Help Contrast Brightness Ego 1 Help Desk Send receive messages to from an administrator who uses Crestron RoomView 156 ENGLISH Chapter 5 Maintenance This chapter describes methods of inspection when there are problems maintenance and replacement of the units ENGLISH 157 Chapter 5 Maintenance Lamp temperature filter indicators Lamp temperature filter indicators If a problem should occur inside the projector the lamp indicators
259. srupted 1 Press AY to select BACKUP INPUT SETTING 2 Press the lt ENTER gt button The BACKUP INPUT SETTING screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select BACKUP INPUT MODE 4 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button OFF Disables the backup function Enables the backup function between the DVI D input and the HDMI input The input is switched as seamless as possible when the same signal is input to the primary and ON 1 secondary inputs Primary input is fixed to the DVI D IN terminal and the secondary input is fixed to the HDMI IN terminal Enables the backup function between the SDI1 input and the SDI2 input The input is switched as seamless as possible when the same signal is input to the primary and 2 secondary inputs Primary input is fixed to the lt SDI IN 1 terminal and the secondary input is fixed to the SDI IN 2 gt terminal 1 Only for PT DW11KE PT DZ10KE 2 Onlyfor PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE 5 Press A V to select AUTOMATIC SWITCHING When BACKUP INPUT MODE is set to OFF AUTOMATIC SWITCHING cannot be selected 6 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button DISABLE Disables the automatic input switching function ENABLE Switches to the secondary input automatically when the input signal for primary input is disrupted ENGLISH 99 Chapter
260. st with a loud sound or have its service life shortened because of shock chipping or degradation due to cumulative runtime The lamp life varies greatly depending on individual differences and usage conditions In particular frequent on off switching of the power greatly deteriorate the lamp and affects the lamp life Continuous use for over one week will deteriorate the lamp The degradation of the lamp due to continuous use can be reduced by using the PROJECTOR SETUP menu LAMP RELAY n rare cases the lamps burst shortly after projection starts The risk of bursting increases when the lamp is used beyond its replacement cycle Make sure to replace the lamp unit regularly When to replace the lamp unit page 163 How to replace the lamp unit amp page 164 e f the lamp bursts gas contained inside of the lamp is released in the form of smoke t is recommended that you store the Replacement lamp unit as a contingency E Computer and external device connections When connecting a computer or an external device read this manual carefully regarding the use of power cords and shielded cables as well Use a commercial cable with a ferrite core for connecting with the DVI D IN terminal E Viewing 3D images Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE The projector can display 3D video signals that are input through various systems such as frame packing and side by side You are required to prepare
261. standby Note When set to ECO network functions SERIAL OUT terminal and some RS 232C commands are not available during standby When set to ECO it may take approx 10 seconds longer before the projector starts projecting after the power is turned on compared with when NORMAL is set 116 ENGLISH Chapter4 Settings PROJECTOR SETUP menu SCHEDULE 1 1 1 1 Set the command execution schedule for each day of the week Enabling disabling the schedule function 1 Press A V to select SCHEDULE 2 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button OFF Disables the schedule function ON Enables the schedule function Refer to How to assign a program page 117 or How to set a program 9 page 117 for how to set the schedule Note When SCHEDULE is set to ON the STANDBY MODE setting is forcibly switched to NORMAL and the setting cannot be changed Even if SCHEDULE is then set to OFF when in this state the setting of STANDBY MODE remains at NORMAL How to assign a program 1 Press A V to select SCHEDULE 2 Press 4b to select ON and press the ENTER button The SCHEDULE screen is displayed 3 Select and assign program to each day of week e Press A V to select the day of week and press q gt to select a program number You can set the program from No 1 to No 7 indicates that the prog
262. stem 3 unit DLP chips DLP type PT DZ13KE PT DZ10KE 2 304 000 pixels 1 920 x 1 200 dots Number of pixels PT DS12KE 1 470 000 pixels 1 400 x 1 050 dots PT DW11KE 1 049 088 pixels 1 366 x 768 dots Lens Optional PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE 380 W UHM lamp x 2 Luminous lamp PT DW11KE PT DZ10KE 355 W UHM lamp x 2 PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE 12 000 Im ANSI Light output PT DW11KE 11 000 Im ANSI PT DZ10KE 10 600 Im ANSI Contrast ratio 10 000 1 when DYNAMIC IRIS is set to 3 Color system 7 standards NTSC NTSC4 43 PAL PAL N PAL M SECAM PAL60 Projection screen size 1 78 m 70 to 25 40 m 1 000 PT DZ13KE PT DZ10KE 16 10 Screen aspect ratio PT DS12KE 4 3 PT DW11KE 16 9 Projection method FRONT CEILING FRONT FLOOR REAR CEILING REAR FLOOR Power cable length 3 0 m 118 1 8 Outer case Molded plastic Width 530 mm 20 7 8 Dimensions Height 200 mm 7 7 8 with legs at shortest position Depth 548 5 mm 21 19 32 excluding the lens Weight Approx 24 0 kg 52 9 Ibs PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE 45 dB Noise level PT DW11KE PT DZ10KE 43 dB Operating environment 0 C 32 F to 45 C 113 F Operating temperature 4 environment Operating environment 10 to 80 96 no condensation humidity Remote control Power supply DC 3 V AA R6 battery x 2 Operating range Within approx 30 m 98 5 when operated d
263. t Enter the POP server name Enter the port number of the POP server Allowed characters Normally 110 Alphanumerics A Z a z 0 9 8 Submit Minus sign and period User name Enter the user name for the POP server or the SMTP server 150 ENGLISH Update the settings Chapter 4 Settings NETWORK menu Contents of E mail sent Example of E mail sent when E mail is set The following E mail is sent when the E mail settings have been established Panasonic projector report CO NF IG URE Projector Type DS12K Serial No SW1234567 one E mail setup data TEMPERATURE WARNING SETUP MINIMUM TIME at 60 minutes interval INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Over 46degC 114degF ERROR OFF LAMP1 RUNTIME OFF at REMAIN 400 H LAMP1 RUNTIME OFF at REMAIN 200 H LAMP2 RUNTIME OFF at REMAIN 400 H LAMP2 RUNTIME OFF at REMAIN 200 H INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE OFF PERIODIC REPORT Sunday OFF Monday ON Tuesday OFF Wednesday OFF Thursday ON Friday OFF Saturday OFF 00 00 ON 01 00 OFF 02 00 OFF 03 00 OFF 04 00 OFF 05 00 OFF 06 00 OFF 07 00 OFF 08 00 OFF 09 00 OFF 10 00 OFF 11 00 OFF 12 00 OFF 13 00 OFF 14 00 OFF 15 00 OFF 16 00 OFF 17 00 OFF 18 00 OFF 19 00 OFF 20 00 OFF 21 00 OFF 22 00 OFF 23 00 OFF check system MAIN CPU BUS OK FAN OK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE OK OPTICS MODULE
264. t screen is displayed press the DEFAULT button The HOME POSITION screen is displayed 2 While the HOME POSITION screen is displayed for approximately five seconds press the ENTER button e PROGRESS is displayed in the HOME POSITION screen and the lens returns to the home position Note The home position of the lens is the lens position when the lens is being replaced or when the projector is being stored and it is not the optical center of the screen e You can also display the HOME POSITION screen by pressing the LENS button on the control panel or the lt SHIFT gt button on the remote control for at least three seconds Perform the lens position shift within the adjustment range The focus may change when the lens position is shifted out of the adjustment range This is because the movement of the lens is restricted to protect the optical parts Projection position can be adjusted with the optical axis shift based on the standard projection position in the respective range ET D75LE1 ET D75LE2 ET D75LE3 ET D75LE4 Projection lens Model No ET D75LE8 ET D75LE10 ET D75LE20 ET D75LE6 ET D75LE30 ET D75LE40 Projection screen width H Projection screen width H H A 0 0 15H mitem si S 0 44 V Projection screen height V PT DZ13KE PT DZ10KE Projection screen height V screen S a l EE Screen us t i Projection screen height V
265. tely corrects aperture and signal 3 Strongly corrects aperture and signal USER Set any desired correction Refer to Adjusting desired correction amount page 76 for details Adjusting desired correction amount 1 Press A V to select DYNAMIC IRIS 2 Press 4b or the ENTER button The DYNAMIC IRIS individual adjustment screen is displayed 3 Press 4b to select USER 4 Press the lt ENTER gt button The DYNAMIC IRIS screen is displayed 5 Press A V to select AUTO IRIS MANUAL IRIS or DYNAMIC GAMMA 6 Press 4b to adjust the correction amount Item Adjustment AUTO IRIS OFF No correction Automatic adjustment of 1 255 Allows you to set in increments of 1 The larger the value the aperture stronger the correction OFF No correction MANUAL IRIS Fixed adjustment of aperture 1 255 Allows you to set in increments of 1 The larger the value the stronger the correction 76 ENGLISH Chapter4 Settings PICTURE menu Item DYNAMIC GAMMA Adjustment of signal compensation Adjustment OFF No correction 1 Slightly compensates the signal 2 Moderately compensates the signal 3 Strongly compensates the signal Note e When DYNAMIC GAMMA is set to 3 the contrast will be maximized Brightness control and iris operate simultaneously but the iris is fully open and does not operate
266. ter E Projector control command Command Details EMS ECE Remark parameter string PON Power on To check if the power is on use the Power query command POF Power standby 000 STANDBY QPW Power query 001 Poweron VID VIDEO RG1 RGB1 RG2 RGB2 IIS Switching the input DVI DVI D signal HD1 HDMI SD1 SDI1 only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DZ10KE SD2 SDI2 only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE 0 DUAL QSL Q for lecti 1 nang uery for lamp selection ii E 2 LAMP1 3 LAMP2 0 DUAL 1 SINGLE LPM Lamp selection 2 LAMP1 3 LAMP2 HIGH only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE NORMAL only for PT DZ10KE OLP Lamp power 1 ECO 8 MIDDLE only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE 1 LAMP1 QSL Lamp cumulative 2 LAMP2 runtime query Response is 0000 to 4000 OSH Shutter 0 OPEN QSH Shutter status query 1 CLOSE 0 DEFAULT VID AUTO f 1 4 3 VSE Aspect ratio switch 2 16 9 5 THROUGH f 6 HV FIT QSE Aspect ratio settings 9 H FIT query 10 V FIT 0 OFF 1 USER1 OPP P IN P execute 2 USER2 3 USER3 0 OFF QPP P IN P setti 1 USER setting que SAR 2 USER2 3 USER3 OCS Sub memory switch QSB Sub memory status 01 96 Sub memory number query 1 Use Lamp 1 or Lamp 2 whichever has a shorter runtime E Projector control command with sub command Command Sub command Details Remark VXX RYCI1 176 ENGLISH RGB1 input setting 00000 RGB YPg
267. th category 5 or higher Use a LAN cable of 100 m 328 1 or shorter Name and function of network function parts 1 LANLINK ACT lamp green Lights on when connected Flashes when transmitting receiving data 2 LAN terminal 10Base T 100Base TX Used to connect the LAN cable here 3 LAN10 100 lamp yellow Lights on when connected to the 100Base TX ENGLISH 139 Chapter 4 Settings NETWORK menu Accessing fromthe web browser 1 Start up the web browser on the computer 2 Enter the IP address set on the projector into the URL entry field of the web browser 3 Enter the user name and the password The factory default setting of the user name is user1 user rights admin1 administrator rights and the password is panasonic lower case Windows Security xm The server 192 168 10 100 at Name0000 requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection oa Sa User name ww Password Remember my credentials OK Cancel 4 Click OK The Projector status page is displayed CB t 192 1680 8c9 bn mam qaoge MENU STATUSSlang e py Bex a reorentrotvntow x I Projector Control Window Projector status Networkstatus Access error log Access log PROJECTOR TYPE DSIZK SERIAL NUMBER SW1234567 MAIN VERSION 1 00
268. the MAIN POWER Solution Replace the lamp unit unit luminous lamp cools Switch to OFF f e f the indicator is still off and then turn on the 9 page 55 and flashing in red even when power consult your dealer having installed the lamp unit consult your dealer 1 The indicator lights up in red while the lamp is turned off and lights up in orange while the lamp is turned on 2 For PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE PT DW11KE 3 300 hours when LAMP POWER is set to NORMAL for PT DZ10KE 3 300 hours when using the optional Replacement lamp unit for portrait mode Model No ET LAD320P 1 pc ET LAD320PW 2 pcs when LAMP POWER is set to MIDDLE or NORMAL Note e f the lamp indicators lt LAMP1 gt lt LAMP2 gt are still lit or flashing after taking the preceding measures ask your dealer for repair 158 ENGLISH Chapter 5 Maintenance Lamp temperature filter indicators Temperature indicator lt TEMP gt EE Flashing in red Flashing in red Indicator status Lighting in red 2 times 3 times Status Warm up status Internal temperature is high Internal temperature is high The cooling fan has warning standby status stopped e Did you turn on the power Is the air intake exhaust port blocked when the temperature Cause was low around 0 C Is the room temperature high 32 F s the filter indicator FILTER lit Remove any objects that are b
269. the preceding measures ask your dealer for repair e f the PROJECTOR SETUP menu LAMP POWER is set to HIGH MIDDLE or NORMAL and an ambient temperature reaches 40 C 104 F or higher 35 C 95 F or higher when HIGH ALTITUDE MODE is set to ON or the Smoke cut filter is used the light output may decrease by approx 20 to protect the projector Filter indicator lt FILTER gt Indicator status Lighting in red Flashing in red Status The filter is clogged The air filter unit is not The temperature inside or outside the projector is abnormally high attached e ion s the air intake exhaust s HIGH ALTITUDE Is the air filter unit Cause ee airallor unit dins port blocked MODE set correctly attached When using the projector at high altitudes between 1 400 m 4 593 or higher and lower than 2 700 m Remove any objects that 9 898 above sealevel Clean or replace the air set HIGH ALTITUDE are blocking the air intake filter unit page 160 MODE 9 page 110 to exhaust port ON Solution Attach the air filter unit Do not use the projector at high altitudes of 2 700 m 8 858 or higher above sea level Note e f the filter indicator FILTER is still lit or flashing after taking the preceding measures ask your dealer for repair e f the filter is clogged only one lamp may light even when LAMP SELECT is set to DUAL By cleaning the air filt
270. the synchronization signal source Use this function when you need to adjust the picture quality such as switching of the aspect ratio or white balance by the same synchronization signal source The sub memory includes all the data that can be adjusted for each signal such as the screen aspect ratio and data adjusted in the PICTURE item CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS etc Registering to the sub memory 1 2 3 4 Press q gt on the normal screen when the menu is not displayed The sub memory registration screen is displayed if the sub memory is not registered Proceed to Step 3 Alist of sub memories registered to the signal currently input is displayed By selecting SUB MEMORY in the PROJECTOR SETUP menu FUNCTION BUTTON the lt FUNC gt button can be used instead of 4 gt Press A V 4b to select the sub memory number to register in SUB MEMORY LIST Press the ENTER button The SIGNAL NAME CHANGE screen is displayed Press A V 4p to select OK and press the ENTER button e To rename the registered signal follow the procedure in Steps 6 and 7 in Renaming the registered signal page 130 Switching to the sub memory 1 2 3 Press q gt on the normal screen when the menu is not displayed Alist of sub memories registered to the signal currently input is displayed Press A V 4b to select the signal to switch in SUB MEMORY LIST Press the ENTER button This switches
271. their condition may worsen suddenly If a child uses the 3D Eyewear guardians should beware of the child s eyes becoming tired 8 ENGLISH Read this first EU To remove the battery Remote Control Battery 1 Press the guide and lift the cover 2 Remove the batteries ENGLISH 9 E Trademarks e Windows Windows Vista and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Mac Mac OS OS X and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the United States and other countries PJLink is a registered trademark or pending trademark in Japan the United States and other countries and regions HDMI the HDMI Logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries VGA and XGA are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States e SVGA is a trademark or registered trademark of Video Electronics Standards Association RoomView and Crestron RoomView are registered trademarks of Crestron Electronics Inc Crestron Connected and Fusion RV are trademarks of Crestron Electronics Inc Art Net Designed by and Copyright Artistic Licence Holdings Ltd Adobe Flash Player is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Inc in the United Stated and or other countries RealD 3D i
272. tion 128 255 No ET UK20 is required Operation not available 0 127 When Operation not 11 Lock 0 available is set operations Operation available 128 255 of all channels become unacceptable Note If the projector is operated with the remote control or on the control panel or by the control command while controlling the projector using the Art Net function the setting of the DMX controller and the computer application may be different from the projector status To reflect the controls of all channels to the projector in that case set Lock of channel 11 to Operation not available and then set back to Operation available When Light volume adjustment in channel 1 is set to 0 image and on screen display disappear When web control administrator rights password is set Protect mode Connecting 1 Obtain the IP address and port number Initial set value 1024 of the projector and request for a connection to the projector You can obtain both the IP address and the port number from the menu screen of the projector IP address Obtain from the main menu gt NETWORK gt NETWORK STATUS Port number Obtain from the main menu gt NETWORK gt NETWORK CONTROL COMMAND PORT 2 Check the response from the projector Data section Blank Mode Blank Random number section Termination symbol Command NTCONTROL i Es 2 ZZZZ
273. tion lens optional 46 Attaching the projection lens 46 Removing the projection lens 46 Connecting cioe reto ian Debet 48 Before connecting sss 48 Connecting example AV equipment 49 Connecting example Computers s 50 12 ENGLISH Be sure to read Read this first from page 2 Chapter 3 Basic Operations Switching on off the projector 52 Connecting the power cord 52 Power indicator 52 Switching on the projector 53 Making adjustments and selections 54 Switching off the projector 55 Direct power off function 55 Projecting sss 56 Selecting the input signal 56 Adjusting the focus zoom and shift 56 Moving the lens to the home position 57 Adjustment range by the lens position shift optical shift 57 Adjusting the lens mounter when the focus is unbalanced 58 Operating with the remote control 61 Using the shutter function 61 Using the on screen display function 61 Switching the input signal 62 Using the Status function 62 Using the Automatic setup function 62 Using the Function button 63 Displaying the internal test pattern 63 Changing the picture aspect ratio 63 Chapter 4 Settings Menu navigation 65 Navigating through the menu 65 Maii MENU jesse o p dee o Por od d tate nba 66 Sub
274. to HDMI SDH SDI Sets the input to SDI SDI1 SDI2 t Sets the input to SDI2 1 Only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE 2 Onlyfor PT DZ10KE Note When BACKUP INPUT MODE in the DISPLAY OPTION menu BACKUP INPUT SETTING page 99 has been set to ON or 1 and the projector has been turned off with the input set to HDMI projection will start with the DVI D input even when STARTUP INPUT SELECT is set to LAST USED e When BACKUP INPUT MODE in the DISPLAY OPTION menu BACKUP INPUT SETTING page 99 has been set to 2 and the projector has been turned off with the input set to SDI2 projection will start with the SDI1 input even when STARTUP INPUT SELECT is set to LAST USED Set the communication conditions of the SERIAL IN gt lt SERIAL OUT gt terminal Setting the communication condition of the SERIAL IN terminal 1 Press AY to select RS 232C 2 Press the ENTER button The RS 232C screen is displayed 3 Press A V to select IN BAUDRATE 4 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button 9600 19200 Select the proper speed 38400 5 Press A V to select IN PARITY 6 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button NONE EVEN Select the parity condition ODD Setting the communication condition of the SERIAL OUT terminal 1 Press AY to
275. to adjust the setting e Set AUTO TESTPATTERN to ON to display a test pattern of selected colors 8 Once all the input is completed press the MENU button The 709MODE or MEASURED MODE screen is displayed When MEASURED is selected in Step 2 proceed to Step 9 and enter the coordinates of desired colors 9 Press A V to select TARGET DATA 10 Press the ENTER button The TARGET DATA screen is displayed 11 Press A V to select a color and press 4P to input coordinates for desired colors e Set AUTO TESTPATTERN to ON to display a test pattern of selected colors 12 Once all the input is completed press the MENU button Note When 709MODE is selected in COLOR MATCHING the ITU R BT 709 standard three primary colors are set as target data Colors are not displayed properly when target data is a color outside the region of this projector The 709MODE may differ slightly from the ITU R BT 709 standard colors Set the AUTO TESTPATTERN to ON to automatically display a test pattern for use in adjusting the selected adjustment colors Before using a colorimeter or similar instrument to measure measurement data set PICTURE MODE to DYNAMIC A difference in the color coordinates of target data and measurement values obtained from an instrument may occur for certain instruments and measurement environments used AUTO TESTPATTERN settings change together with the AUTO TESTPATTERN of EDGE BLENDIN
276. ts any trapezoidal distortion in the projected image CORNER CORRECTION Adjusts any distortion in the four corners of the projected image CURVED Adjusts any curved distortion in the projected image ENGLISH 81 Chapter4 Settings POSITION menu PC 1 PC 2 Uses the computer to perform geometric adjustment PC 3 1 Advanced skills are necessary to use a computer to control geometric adjustment Consult your dealer Up to three geometric adjustments performed using the computer can be saved Setting KEYSTONE or CURVED 1 2 3 4 5 Press AY to select GEOMETRY Press 4P to select KEYSTONE or CURVED Press the ENTER button The GEOMETRY KEYSTONE or GEOMETRY CURVED screen is displayed Press AY to select the item to adjust Press q gt to adjust KEYSTONE LENS THROW RATIO Set the throw ratio for the lens used VERTICAL KEYSTONE HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE im 111 1 Md SSS C m m Adjust the setting according to the lens shift range in the vertical direction Adjust the setting according to the lens shift range in the horizontal direction CURVED LENS THROW RATIO Set the throw ratio for the lens used VERTICAL KEYSTONE HORIZONTAL
277. ualified technician to replace the lamp unit Consult your dealer Warning Replace the lamp unit after the lamp has cooled after waiting at least one hour The high temperature inside the cover will cause burns Checking the lamp unit to be replaced 1 Check the status of the lamp indicators lt LAMP1 gt lt LAMP2 gt The lamp unit corresponding to the lamp indicator that is lit in red is required to be replaced Notes on the replacement of the lamp unit e A Phillips screwdriver is necessary when replacing the lamp unit Since the luminous lamp is made of glass it may burst if dropped or hit with a hard object Handle with care Do not disassemble or modify the lamp unit When replacing the lamp unit be sure to hold it by the handle because its surface is pointed and its shape is protruded The lamp contains mercury When disposing of used lamp units contact your local authorities or dealer for correct methods of disposal Attention Panasonic takes no responsibility for any damage or malfunction of the product resulting from use of lamp units which are not manufactured by Panasonic Use only specified lamp units e For the portrait setting be sure to use the optional Replacement lamp unit for portrait mode Do not use the Replacement lamp unit for portrait mode and normal lamp unit together Use the Replacement lamp unit for portrait mode only when installing the projector in the portrait s
278. us test pattern is displayed the color can be changed 1 Press b to select the Menu Screen Focus test pattern 2 Press the ENTER button The TEST PATTERN COLOR screen is displayed 3 Press AY to select a color and press the ENTER button The test pattern color changed to the color selected Note The test pattern color settings return to WHITE when the projector is switched off Colors of the test patterns other than focus test patterns cannot be changed ENGLISH 129 Chapter 4 Settings SIGNAL LIST menu SIGNAL LIST menu On the menu screen select SIGNAL LIST from the main menu Refer to Navigating through the menu page 65 for the operation of the menu screen B Registered signal details Memory number A1 1 2 Sub memory number When the address number A1 A2 L7 L8 signal is registered Aname can be set for each sub memory 9 page 132 After a new signal is input and the MENU button on the remote control or the control panel is pressed the registration is completed and the MAIN MENU screen is displayed Note Up to 96 signals including sub memories can be registered to the projector There are 12 pages eight memories of A through L with eight memories possible on each page for memory numbers and the signal is registered to the lowest number that is available If there is no available memory number it will be overwr
279. ust the position Orientation Operation Adjustment Vertical up and down adjustment Press the A button The image position moves up Press the W button The image position moves down Horizontal right and left adjustment Note Press the gt button The image position moves to the right Press the 4 button The image position moves to the left e For the portrait setting image position is moved horizontally when Vertical up and down adjustment is made Image position is moved vertically when Horizontal right and left adjustment is made You can switch the aspect ratio of the image The aspect ratio is switched within the screen range selected in SCREEN SETTING Set SCREEN SETTING first page 97 1 Press A V to select ASPECT 2 Press 4b or the ENTER button The ASPECT individual adjustment screen is displayed 3 Press 4b to switch the item The items will switch each time you press the button ENGLISH 79 Chapter4 Settings POSITION menu DEFAULT Displays images without changing the aspect ratio of the input signals The projector identifies the video ID VID embedded in the video signals and displays the image by VID AUTO automatically switching the screen sizes between 4 3 and 16 9 This function is effective for NTSC signals The projector identifies the video ID VID embedded in the video sign
280. ut to dual link Note When BACKUP INPUT MODE is set to ON 1 or 2 SDI LINK cannot be set Setting SIGNAL LEVEL Select the amplitude of the signal to input 1 2 3 4 Press AY to select SDI IN Press the ENTER button The SDI IN screen is displayed Press A V to select SIGNAL LEVEL Press b to switch the item 64 940 Normally use this setting 4 1019 Select when gray is displayed as black Setting BIT DEPTH 1 2 3 4 Press AY to select SDI IN Press the ENTER button The SDI IN screen is displayed Press AY to select BIT DEPTH Press 4P to switch the item AUTO Automatically select 12 bits or 10 bits 12 bit Fix to 12 bits 10 bit Fix to 10 bits Setting 3G SDI MAPPING 1 2 3 4 Press AY to select SDI IN Press the ENTER button The SDI IN screen is displayed Press AY to select 3G SDI MAPPING Press 4P to switch the item AUTO Automatically select level A or level B LEVEL A Fix to level A LEVEL B Fix to level B 102 ENGLISH Chapter 4 Settings DISPLAY OPTION menu Note Does not operate during SD SDI or HD SDI input Set the on screen display Setting OSD POSITION Set the position of the menu screen OSD 1 Press A V to select ON SCREEN DISPLAY 2 Press the ENTER button The ON SCREEN DISPLAY scre
281. utside ENGLISH 59 Chapter 3 Basic Operations Projecting 6 Press the lt SHIFT gt button on the remote control or the LENS button on the control panel to display the SHIFT adjustment menu and reset the screen position of the projected image on the screen surface back to an optimal state 7 Perform focus adjustment again near the center of the screen and if it is still not enough fine tune the amount of rotation of the adjustment screws 8 When adjustments have been made securely tighten the loosened fixing screws 9 Adjust the focus again using the remote control 60 ENGLISH Chapter3 Basic Operations Operating with the remote control Operating with the remote control cm POWER f EB ON STANDBY RGB 1I RGB 2 DVI D INPUT SELECT HOMI Z 4 E oa Cer 5 aJ 73 sus uor KELEOS Panasonic PROJECTOR If the projector is not used for a certain period of time during the meeting intermission for example it is possible to turn off the image temporarily button 1 Press the lt SHUTTER gt button The image disappears e This operation can be also performed using the lt SHUTTER gt button on the control panel 2 Press the lt SHUTTER gt button again The image is displayed Note The power indicator ON G STANDBY R gt will flash slowly in green while the shutter is closed You can set the speed of shutter opening closing via the DISPLAY OPTI
282. while a brightness measurement is performed SYSTEM SELECTOR 1 11 The projector will automatically detect the input signal but you can set the system method manually when an unstable signal is input Set the system method matching the input signal 1 2 3 4 Press A V to select SYSTEM SELECTOR Press the ENTER button Press AY to select a system format Available system formats vary depending on the input signal Terminal System format VIDEO IN terminal G Y gt lt B P C gt terminals Select AUTO NTSC NTSC4 43 PAL PAL M PAL N SECAM or PAL60 Set it to AUTO normally Setting AUTO will automatically select NTSC NTSC4 43 PAL PAL M PAL N SECAM or PAL60 Switch the setting to the signal method for the TV used RGB 1 IN terminal RGB 2 IN terminal 480i 576i or 576p signal Select RGB or YCgC VGA60 or 480p signal Select VGA60 480p YC Cal or 480p RGB Other movie based signals Select RGB or Y PPR DVI D IN terminal 480i 576i 480p or 576p signal Select RGB or YCgCp Other movie based signals Select RGB or YPsPl lt HDMI IN terminal 480i 576i 480p or 576p signal Select AUTO RGB or YC amp C4 Other movie based signals Select AUTO RGB or YP amp P lt SDI IN 1 terminal lt SDI IN 2 terminal only for PT DZ13KE PT DS12KE
283. while adjusting automatically page 62 lt SHUTTER gt button Used to temporarily turn off the image page 61 lt ASPECT gt button Switches the aspect ratio of the image page 63 Lens lt FOCUS gt lt ZOOM gt lt SHIFT gt buttons Adjusts the projection lens page 56 lt FUNC gt button Assigns a frequently used operation as a shortcut button 9 page 63 DEFAULT button Resets the content of the sub menu to the factory default 9 page 66 ID SET button Sets the ID number of the remote control to use for a system using multiple projectors page 28 ID ALL button Used to simultaneously control all the projectors with one remote control for a system using multiple projectors 9 page 28 LOCK button Used to prevent unintended operation by careless pressing of the buttons and prevent draining the remote control batteries Remote control signal transmitter Remote control wired terminal Connects to the projector with a cable page 29 Chapter 1 Preparation About your projector Note The remote control can be used within a distance of about 30 m 98 5 if pointed directly at the remote control signal receiver The remote control can control at angles of up to 15 vertically and 30 horizontally but the effective control range may be reduced e f there are any obstacles between the remote control and the remote control signal receiver the remote control may not operate p
284. without putting strong pressure on the filter unit Rinse the air filter unit two to three times using fresh water each time Insufficient rinsing may result in odors Dry the air filter unit Fig 2 Let the air filter unit naturally dry off in a well ventilated place where there is little dust and is not exposed to direct sunlight Do not dry using drying devices such as dryers After the air filter is dried proceed to Attaching the air filter unit page 161 Attaching the air filter unit Tabs on the projector body Groove on the projector body LONE Tabs on the projector body Protrusion of the air filter unit a I Protrusion of the air filter unit Groove on the projector body 1 Attach the air filter unit to the projector The air filter unit has no difference between top and bottom but is two sided Match the protrusion position of the air filter unit with the grooves on the projector body Hook the air filter unit frame at the exhaust port side to the two tabs of the back side of the projector s air filter unit compartment and perform Step 2 in Removing the air filter unit in the reverse order to attach Confirm that the tabs of the air filter unit compartment of the projector body are hooked to the air filter unit frame 2 Attach the air filter cover to the projector and use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the air filter
285. x LT L 2 7126 x SD 0 1064 ET D75LE2 Min LW L 2 2165 x SD 0 0795 2 7 to 4 1 1 4 3 Max LT L 3 3228 x SD 0 1064 Min LW L 2 7126 x SD 0 0958 3 1 to 5 2 1 16 9 Max LT L 4 5315 x SD 0 1216 ET D75LE3 Min LW L 3 3228 x SD 0 0958 4 1 to 6 9 1 4 3 Max LT L 5 5472 x SD 0 1216 Min LW L 4 5315 x SD 0 1158 5 2 to 8 2 1 16 9 Max LT L 7 2087 x SD 0 1013 ET D75LE4 Min LW L 5 5472 x SD 0 1158 6 9 to 11 0 1 4 3 Max LT L 8 8228 x SD 0 1013 Min LW L 7 2087 x SD 0 3862 8 2 to 15 4 1 16 9 Max LT L 13 5039 x SD 0 3598 ET D75LE8 Min LW L 8 8228 x SD 0 3862 10 9 to 20 5 1 4 3 Max LT L 16 5354 x SD 0 3598 Min LW L 0 9094 x SD 0 0566 1 0 to 1 2 1 16 9 Max LT L 1 0906 x SD 0 0736 ET D75LE6 A Min LW L 1 1142 x SD 0 0566 1 4 to 1 6 1 4 3 Max LT L 1 3346 x SD 0 0736 Min LW L 1 2759 x SD 0 0857 1 4 to 1 9 1 16 9 Max LT L 1 6491 x SD 0 1085 ET D75LE10 Min LW L 1 5620 x SD 0 0857 1 9 to 2 5 1 4 3 Max LT L 2 0190 x SD 0 1085 44 ENGLISH Chapter 2 Getting Started Setting up Projection lens Model No Throw ratio Aspect ratio Projection distance L formula Min LW L 1 6324 x SD 0 0832 1 8 to 2 7 1 16 9 Max LT L 2 3720 x SD 0 1162 ET D75LE20 Min LW L 1 9986 x SD 0 0832 2 5 to 3 6 1 4 3 Max LT
286. y is overloaded ex by using too many adapters overheating may occur and fire will result B ON USE INSTALLATION Do not place the projector on soft materials such as carpets or sponge mats Doing so will cause the projector to overheat which can cause burns fire or damage to the projector Do not set up the projector in humid or dusty places or in places where the projector may come into contact with oily smoke or steam ex a bathroom Using the projector under such conditions will result in fire electric shocks or deterioration of components Deterioration of components such as ceiling mount brackets may cause the projector which is mounted on the ceiling to fall down Do not install this projector in a place which is not strong enough to take the full weight of the projector or on top of a surface which is sloped or unstable Failure to observe this will cause projector to fall down or tip over the projector and severe injury or damage could result 4 ENGLISH Read this first WARNING Do not cover the air intake exhaust ports or place anything within 500 mm 20 of them Doing so will cause the projector to overheat which can cause fire or damage to the projector e Do not place the projector in narrow badly ventilated places e Do not place the projector on cloth or papers as these materials could be drawn into the air intake port Do not place your hands or other objects close to the air exhaust po
287. you press A W to select CANCEL and then press the ENTER button the lens memory will not be saved e f you press A W to select DEFAULT and press the ENTER button the entered name will not be registered and the default name will be used f you select OK without entering any characters and press the ENTER button the default name will be used Loading the lens position 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press A V to select LENS MEMORY Press the ENTER button Press AY to select LENS MEMORY LOAD Press the ENTER button The LENS MEMORY LOAD screen is displayed Press AY to select the item to load and press the ENTER button When the confirmation screen is displayed press 4P to select OK and press the ENTER button The lens moves automatically to the registered shift zoom and focus positions Note Lens memory is not guaranteed to be 100 reproduced The zoom and focus positions may have shifted after lens memory was loaded Readjust as necessary Beware of shift as errors in zoom position are particularly significant When a lens is replaced readjust and save the lens memory again If a lens without zoom function is used the lens memory of the zoom position does not operate When LENS MEMORY LOAD is assigned to the lt FUNC gt button the lens memory is loaded in order each time you press the lt FUNC gt button Deleting a lens memory 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Operating Instructions - FTP Directory Listing

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents